JP2021078938A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing mixture of a screw member into a putout part.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a first guidance passage formation part 202 for forming a guidance passage for guiding game balls of a ball tank formation part 201 to a putout device 200; and cover parts (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover one portion of an upper surface of the first guidance passage formation part 202. Predetermined limitation parts (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and a recessed part 336) for restricting falling of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 falling onto the cover part onto the first guidance passage formation part 202 are provided in the cover part. Plural specific limitation parts (for example, hole parts 271A to 271H) for restricting movement of screw members falling on the first guidance passage formation part 202 to the putout device 200 are provided in the first guidance passage formation part 202.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

In a pachinko gaming machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, a storage unit capable of storing game media supplied from a game island installed in a game hall, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out the game medium, and a payout unit. Some have a guide passage forming portion for forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium supplied to the storage portion to the payout portion, and these storage portions and the guide passage forming portion are attached to the game frame by a screw member. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-96050

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion to the game frame, the screw member attached to the inside of the game island, and the like are removed to form the storage portion and the guidance passage. If it falls into the section, the screw member will be mixed into the payout device together with the game medium, and the game medium cannot be paid out normally, the payout device will break down, or the screw member will be the player together with the game medium. There was a problem that it was sometimes paid out.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a screw member from being mixed in a payout portion.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201) capable of storing a game medium (for example, a game ball P) and a storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201).
A payout unit (for example, a payout device 200) capable of paying out game media, and
A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the payout portion. And the second guide passage forming part 204),
A cover portion (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion.
A display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 or the like).
A predetermined limiting portion (for example, elongated hole 316A) for limiting the falling of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover portion to the guide passage forming portion on the cover portion. ~ 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
The guide passage forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific limiting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guidance passage forming portion to the payout portion (FIG. 11). , Fig. 12 and Fig. 27),
The predetermined limiting portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) is provided so as to be able to drop from the cover portion without retaining the game medium that has fallen on the cover portion. ,
The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the image display device 5). The display area includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51).
The display means
The background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 may display the background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Being able to display a background image corresponding to the jackpot game state, etc.),
In the second display area, it is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted game value on the front side of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background in the second display area 20SH52. On the front side of the image, it is possible to display 20 SHK, which is the number of prize balls awarded, etc.),
At least in the first display area, the amount of game value given has reached the first predetermined amount as a notification display on the front side of the background image to notify that the amount of game value has reached a predetermined amount. It is possible to display a first notification display for notifying that and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be imparted has reached the second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 has at least a second notification display). 1 In the display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image, as the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state has reached the number of "Kiriban", it is given in the big hit game state. When the number of prize balls reaches "1000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over", and when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", " It is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over"),
The grant amount display is updated every time the game value is given in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition number display 20SHK is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state, etc.). ,
The notification display ends when a specific period elapses from the start of the display (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the display. etc),
The characters used for the notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKK are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). Size letters, etc.),
The characters used in the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH). Includes a specific character that forms a specific area surrounded by lines that form the character, etc.),
The background image of the specific character used for the given amount display is invisible from the specific area (for example, the background image of the specific character used for the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible from the specific area). The background image of the specific character used for the notification display is visible from the specific area (for example, the background image of the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKK is visible from the specific area). Things, etc.),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion. Further, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined limiting portion and the state in which the screw member can always stay can be maintained, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. can do. In addition, a display including specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the gaming machine of the following means 2. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-17403, the amount of the added value for the game given in an advantageous state favorable to the player is displayed, and the value for the game is given. There was a notification display for notifying that the amount reached a predetermined amount, and a display capable of displaying. In such a gaming machine, for example, a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed is used for various displays such as a grant amount display and a notification display, and for example, an advantageous state is used. Although the background image corresponding to various states is displayed, there is room for improvement in the relationship between the specific character and the background image, and in view of this point, the display including the specific character is suitable in relation to the background image. It is required to provide a gaming machine that can be displayed on the screen.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.).
A display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.) is provided.
The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the image display device 5). The display area includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51).
The display means
The background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 may display the background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Being able to display a background image corresponding to the jackpot game state, etc.),
In the second display area, it is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted game value on the front side of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background in the second display area 20SH52. On the front side of the image, it is possible to display 20 SHK, which is the number of prize balls awarded, etc.),
At least in the first display area, the amount of game value given has reached the first predetermined amount as a notification display on the front side of the background image to notify that the amount of game value has reached a predetermined amount. It is possible to display a first notification display for notifying that and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be imparted has reached the second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 has at least a second notification display). 1 In the display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image, as the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state has reached the number of "Kiriban", it is given in the big hit game state. When the number of prize balls reaches "1000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over", and when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", " It is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over"),
The grant amount display is updated every time the game value is given in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition number display 20SHK is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state, etc.). ,
The notification display ends when a specific period elapses from the start of the display (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the display. etc),
The characters used for the notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKK are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). Size letters, etc.),
The characters used in the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH). Includes a specific character that forms a specific area surrounded by lines that form the character, etc.),
The background image of the specific character used for the given amount display is invisible from the specific area (for example, the background image of the specific character used for the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible from the specific area). The background image of the specific character used for the notification display is visible from the specific area (for example, the background image of the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKK is visible from the specific area). Things, etc.),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, a display including specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a pachinko game machine. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is a left side view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is a top view which shows the frame for a game machine to which a game board is attached. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the pachinko game machine is seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the game board was removed from the game machine frame. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the attachment structure of the passage forming body to the frame for a game machine. It is an enlarged rear view which shows the upper part of the back of the frame for a game machine. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10A, FIG. 10B is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 10A, and FIG. 10C is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 10A. (A) is a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is an EE sectional view of (A), and (C) is an FF sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing a second cover body, (B) is a GG cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is an HF cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing a third cover body, (B) is an I-I cross-sectional view of (A), (C) is a JJ cross-sectional view of (A), and (D) is a third cover body. FIG. 5 (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a first guide passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball stop member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball stop member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view which shows. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame on which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK cross section of (A), and (C) is an LL cross section of (B). It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the ball tank part on the back surface of a game frame diagonally from the back. (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line MM of (A). It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the 1st guide passage forming part on the back surface of a game frame from diagonally behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guide passage forming part on the back surface of a game frame. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a diagram showing a rotational state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along the line OO of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP of FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ of FIG. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR of FIG. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS of FIG. (A) is a staying state of the screw member when the ball fixing member is in the first state, (B) is a TT cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is a state when the ball fixing member is in the second state. The staying state of the screw member, (D) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line UU of (C). It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage forming part which shows the moving state of a screw member. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage forming part which shows the moving state of the game ball on the cover part. (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine in the feature part 053SG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface in the state which the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern branched from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground region formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground region formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the connection mode of the low voltage component and the high voltage component mounted on the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which the game control board in Example 1 is housed in a board case. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1 and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on a solder surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 is attached to a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 is attached to a game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the solder surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in relation to the connection of the game control microcomputer, the input circuit, and the output circuit on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in relation to the connection of the game control microcomputer, the input circuit, and the output circuit on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram relating to the connection between the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit on the game control board according to the second embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is the perspective view from the upper part of the specific electronic component, (B) is the lower part of the specific electronic component. It is a perspective view from. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which the specific electronic component is soldered to the game control board in Example 3. FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the lighting example of a game effect lamp. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of various display processing. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of the state which a game ball is sandwiched by a special variable winning ball device. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of various display processing. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. It is a figure which shows the background technique which concerns on the 1st form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number display, etc. in the 1st form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the acquisition number display in the 1st form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the 1st form of the feature unit 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the result display in the 3rd form of a feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production period of various effects in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of various effects in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion by the ending background image in the 3rd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the background technique which concerns on the 4th form of a feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the remaining number display in the 4th form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the remaining number notification display in the 4th form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the remaining number display in the 4th form of the feature part 20SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change of the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display in the 4th form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display in the first form of the feature unit 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect operation when a prize occurs during a round in a feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers which display various displays in a feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect operation when the over prize is generated in the feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers which display various displays in a feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion by the over-winning effect in the feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect operation when there is a round which did not win a predetermined number and a round where an over prize occurred in the feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect operation when there is a round which did not win a predetermined number and a round where an over prize occurred in the feature part 19SH.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201) capable of storing a game medium (for example, a game ball P) and a storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201).
A payout unit (for example, a payout device 200) capable of paying out game media, and
A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the payout portion. And the second guide passage forming part 204),
It is characterized by having.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
A cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, a cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, a cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, and a cover portion of the third cover body 330. With 334)
The cover portion restricts the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover portion from falling to the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). (For example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) are provided for this purpose (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the third embodiment is the gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
The predetermined limiting portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) is provided so as to be able to drop from the cover portion without retaining the game medium that has fallen on the cover portion. It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the game medium does not stay in the predetermined limiting portion, and the state in which the screw member can always stay can be maintained. Therefore, the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion falls into the guide passage forming portion. It can be prevented from doing so.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the second or third embodiment.
The predetermined limiting portion is a first retaining portion (for example, elongated hole 316A) capable of retaining a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has fallen on the cover portion on the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (for example, recessed grooves 326A to 326C).
The second retention portion is provided at a position closer to the payout portion (for example, the payout device 200) than the first retention portion, and is larger than the first retention portion (L22B> L21).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the screw member tends to stay in the retention portion as it approaches the payout portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth embodiments.
The payout portion (for example, a payout device) of a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). A plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement to the 200) are provided (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment.
The specific limiting portion is a plurality of hole portions (for example, hole portions 271A to 271H).
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size capable of dropping the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion before reaching the payout portion. Has (L11> L2, see FIG. 11)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped from the hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member mixed in the guiding passage forming portion is mixed in the payout portion. Can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game medium from being hindered by the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.
The plurality of holes have different sizes.
The largest predetermined hole among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the payout (for example, the left-right dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the left-right dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G. (See Fig. 12)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member dropped into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion. ..

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth or seventh aspect.
On the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202), the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330). There is an uncovered area (eg, uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover section 334) of the
At least a part (for example, holes 271B to 271H) of the plurality of specific restriction portions is provided at a position corresponding to the uncovered region in the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the screw member is mixed into the guide passage forming portion from the uncovered region, it can be dropped from the hole portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects.
A gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201) is provided.
The storage unit
It is arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (for example, the first protruding portion 224) of the game frame.
It is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter the upper surface of the predetermined portion (see L30 <L1, FIG. 19 (B)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion and the storage portion of the game frame and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of the tenth form is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth forms.
A first substrate (for example, a main substrate 11, an effect control substrate 12, etc.) attached at a position lower than the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202).
A second substrate (for example, a terminal substrate 210) attached at a position above the guide passage forming portion,
With
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using a screw member, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member (for example, the board cases 11A, 12A and the like are screw members. The terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a locking means including a plurality of regulating portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members. (See Fig. 17)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the eleventh form is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect.
The second board is an external output board (for example, terminal board 210) to which wiring (for example, cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected.
The first substrate has a smaller number of wires to be connected than the external output substrate (for example, a plurality of connection hole portions 231 of the terminal substrate 210 as the first substrate provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202). The number of cables C that can be connected to the cable C is the first number (for example, 20), while the second main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide passage forming portion 202 are connected. Each signal line is also connected to the board, but the number is the second number (for example, 10 lines), which is less than the first number.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is easily subjected to an external force during the wiring connection work, cannot be attached by the screw member, the screw member comes off due to the external force applied to the external output board. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the 12th form is the gaming machine according to the 10th or 11th form.
A gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201) and a gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3).
A mounting frame (for example, a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board on the game frame,
With
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame limiting portion (for example, a recess 242) for restricting the movement of a screw member dropped onto the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion by utilizing the mounting frame of the external output substrate.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twelfth forms.
The guide passage of a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has moved toward the guide passage forming portion around the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). Special limiting portions (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to limit the fall to the forming portion (FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), 24. reference)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the 14th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 13th embodiment.
The special restriction portion attaches a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the guide passage forming portion. A special retention portion (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attachment portion.
The screw member that has come off from the attached portion but has not retained in the special retaining portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the form 15 is the gaming machine according to the form 13 or 14.
The special retaining portion is a recess (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a part of the screw member.
The depth of the recess is a depth at which a part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is housed (see FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the screw member staying in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of the 16th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 15th aspects.
A cover portion (for example, a cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) is provided.
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the payout portion side.
A specific portion (for example, a ball stopper 340) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen on the cover portion in the cover portion is provided on the payout portion side in the inclined direction of the cover portion (FIG. 15, FIG. 26, FIG. 27)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the form 17 is the gaming machine according to the form 16.
The specific portion (for example, the ball stop member 340) has a first state in which the game medium (for example, the game ball P) of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) can flow down. It is possible to change to a second state in which the game medium of the guide passage forming portion is difficult to flow down or cannot flow down (for example, the rotating portion 341 is located in the upright position, and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344. Then, in the first state in which the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, the rotating portion 341 is located at the tilted position, and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344. The game ball can be brought into contact with the game ball, and the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 can be changed to a second state in which the game ball cannot flow down (or is difficult to flow down) to the second guide passage forming portion 204.) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member is more likely to stay than in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 18th form is the gaming machine according to the 16th or 17th form.
The cover part
A first cover portion (for example, a first cover portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336)) capable of retaining a screw member dropped on the cover portion on the cover portion. For example, the cover portion 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320),
Unlike the first cover portion, the second cover portion provided with the specific portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) and
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 19th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 18th aspect.
The second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (for example, screw member N16) having a locking portion (for example, a flange portion F) (FIG. 8). reference)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 20th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 19th embodiments.
A gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201) is provided.
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members having a locking portion (for example, screw members N11 to N14).
The screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is such that the screw member falls outside the guide passage forming portion even if it comes off from the game frame. It is installed (see Fig. 8)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the screw member that attaches the storage portion is hard to come off from the game frame, while the screw member that attaches the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion falls out of the guide passage forming portion even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 21st embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 20th embodiment.
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the gaming frame (for example, the gaming machine frame 3). Of these, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the peripheral edge of the gaming machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 22nd form is the gaming machine according to the 20th or 21st form.
The screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are for reinforcing the game frame. It is attached to a metal member (for example, a metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the storage portion can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of the form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 20 to 22.
The screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached to the upper position of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game frame (for example, the gaming machine frame 3) are It is characterized in that it is a screw member different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 24th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 20th to 23rd forms.
A game board (for example, a game board 2) that can be attached to and detached from the game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) is provided.
In the region below the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game board, an inclined surface (for example, the cover body 220) on which the falling screw member can flow down is above. Wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20, 27).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board from bouncing and being mixed into the guide passage forming portion again.

The gaming machine of the 25th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 24th forms.
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of the first modification 1) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) is provided.
The guide passage forming portion is
A first passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) extending so as to incline downward toward one side (for example, the left side), and
A second passage forming portion (for example, a second guide passage forming portion 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming portion, and
Have,
The cover portion is provided along the first passage forming portion so that the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion moves and falls from the lower end portion to the outside of the guiding passage forming portion (FIG. 29 (FIG. 29). A) See)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 26th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 2nd to 25th forms.
Wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided at a position near the predetermined limiting portion (for example, recess 361) in the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of the modified example 1) so as to intersect the guide passage forming portion. (See Fig. 29 (B))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the screw member is easily caught in the wiring and stays in the predetermined limiting portion.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is the rear. Further, the description will be described with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hit ball launching device and hit into the game area Y. Further, the game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin, and is formed in a substantially square shape in front view. It is composed of a board surface plate provided with (not shown), a guide rail 2b, and the like, and a spacer member integrally attached to the back surface side of the board surface plate. The game board 2 is formed of a non-translucent member such as a veneer board in a substantially square shape in front view, and is provided on a board surface board provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 2b, etc. on the front game board surface. May be configured.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area Y). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5. A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area), a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning opening is used. It is in a closed state where the game ball does not enter (also called the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening because the starting winning opening door is in the open position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second). It is also said that the starting winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device including an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces. Further, when a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area Y). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area Y, an out port (not shown) is provided to which a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings is taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area Y. Has been done. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area Y by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device ( A ball feeding plate (upper plate) for storing) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is a payout exit where prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. A hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) may be provided.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area Y by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It is not necessary that there is a "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board 37 (see FIG. 3), an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board 91 (see FIG. 3) are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first start prize or a second start prize, and if there is a prize, a random number value for determining a special figure display result, determining a jackpot type, determining a fluctuation pattern, or the like. Are extracted and stored (stored) at the highest level of free entries in the first special figure reservation storage unit and the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the start winning process is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit and the second special figure hold storage unit, and the special figure display result. Based on the numerical data indicating the random value for judgment, it is decided (predetermined) whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is a "big hit" before the variation display result is derived and displayed. Executes normal symbol processing. That is, when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the special figure game, whether or not to derive and display the jackpot display result as the display result of the variable display based on the random number value stored when the start winning is generated. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the back structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a frame for a gaming machine to which a gaming board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is viewed from diagonally behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming board is removed from the gaming machine frame. The glass door frame 50 is not shown in FIGS. 5 to 7.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 2, a gaming machine frame 3 to which the gaming board 2 is detachably provided, and the game centering on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. It has a glass door frame 50 provided so that the front surface of the machine frame 3 can be opened and closed, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 that supports the game machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable around the left side. By fixing the outer frame 60 to the gaming island (not shown) installed in, it can be installed on the gaming island.

At the upper part of the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3, a replenishment device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4) is provided from a circulation path of a gaming ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a gaming ball P) provided inside a gaming island (not shown). A ball tank forming portion 201 forming a storage portion capable of storing the game balls supplied via the ball tank forming portion 201 and a first guide passage for guiding the game balls stored in the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the left side are formed. The first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first passage forming body 203 including the first guide passage forming portion 202 are extended in the left-right direction along the upper side portion 3A of the gaming machine frame 3. Further, a terminal substrate 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202.

The replenishment device 150 sends out a predetermined number (for example, 10 or the like) of a guiding member 150A composed of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding the gaming balls in the circulation path of the gaming island and the gaming balls guided by the guiding member 150A. The sprocket (not shown), the drive source for driving the sprocket (not shown), and the opening of the outer frame 60 are pressed against the gaming machine frame 3 when the opening is closed by the gaming machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state, the gaming ball delivered by the sprocket is the ball tank forming portion 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the gaming machine frame 3 in the open state, the gaming ball delivered by the sprocket is held so that it cannot be dropped. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming unit 201 decreases when the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the sprocket is rotated by the drive source and a predetermined number of game balls are sent out by the ball tank forming unit 201. It is supposed to be supplied to. Further, in the replenishment device 150, a case body 150B is formed by assembling a plurality of members with a plurality of screw members (not shown), and the case body 150B uses a plurality of screw members (not shown) to form a game island. It is fixed in place.

Further, a second guide passage forming portion 204 forming a second guide passage for guiding the game ball guided to the left side by the first guide passage forming portion 202 and a game guided by the second guide passage forming portion 204. A payout device 200 constituting a payout unit capable of paying out balls and a game ball paid out by the payout device 200 are guided to an upper plate, that is, a payout passage for paying out the game ball to a player is formed. Pachinko game to discharge the game ball guided by the payout passage forming unit 205 and the second guide passage forming part 204 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 without paying out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205. A second passage forming body 207 including a ball removing passage forming portion 206 for forming a ball removing passage for guiding to a discharge portion (not shown) provided in the lower portion on the back side of the machine 1 and a gaming machine frame 3 It extends vertically along the left side of the back of the building.

The payout device 200 is composed of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has a sprocket for paying out game balls by a predetermined number of balls (for example, one ball), a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game. A switching valve that can switch the flow path of the ball between the payout passage and the ball removing passage, an operation lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Further, in the lower part of the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3, a board case 91A in which the power supply board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which the payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided.

In the present embodiment, a ball-out switch (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided at a predetermined position in the second guide passage, and the CPU 103 detects a detection signal from the ball-out switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there is a game ball to be paid out to the second guide passage on the upstream side of the payout device 200. Then, when the off state of the ball out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that the game ball is not supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball clogging, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and the payout is performed. The payout operation by the device 200 is stopped. Further, by displaying a replenishment error on a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 and outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the glass door frame 50 is connected to the effect control CPU 120. It is possible to execute a notification process indicating that a replenishment error has occurred, such as by causing the game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined position on the front surface to emit light in an error mode.

As shown in FIG. 7, the gaming board 2 is detachably arranged from the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in the opening 221 formed in the substantially central portion of the gaming machine frame 3. The game board 2 includes a plate-shaped body 2a composed of the above-mentioned board surface plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-shaped body 2a, and a plate-shaped body 2a. Electronic components such as an image display device 5 provided on the back side of the above, an effect device having a movable body 32, a substrate case 12A in which the effect control board 12 is housed, and a board case 11A in which the main board 11 is housed, and a plate shape. It is a structure including a cover body 220 that protects a part, an effect device, an electronic component, and the like.

The substrate cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are configured so that each substrate can be housed inside by a base member and a cover member made of a transparent synthetic resin material. Among these, the substrate cases 11A and 12A have. The board cases 91A and 37A are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 or the gaming board 2 by one or a plurality of screw members N20 and N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the substrate cases 91A and 37A are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Alternatively, it is attached to the game board 2. Further, the cover body 220 is formed in a box shape in which the front surface is opened by a transparent synthetic resin material, and a part of the back surface is an opening / closing portion 220A that can rotate around the right side, and is one of the back surfaces of the game board 2. The part can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the first passage forming body 203 and the second passage forming body 207 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3 and the cover body 220 forming the back surface of the gaming board 2 are used for gaming. In a state where the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3, the outer frame 60 projects rearward from the outer frame 60. In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged at the rear position of the upper plate of the outer frame 60 in the upper back surface of the gaming machine frame 3. In a state where the outer frame 60 of the gaming machine 1 is fixed to the gaming island (not shown), the gaming ball can be supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from the circulation path above the gaming island via the replenishing device 150. ..

(Mounting structure of the first passage forming body 203)
Next, the structure for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing a structure for attaching the passage forming body to the frame for a gaming machine. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper part of the back surface of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in the front view, and an opening 221 for mounting the gaming board 2 is formed, and is above the opening 221. A metal plate 222 for reinforcement is provided on the back surface of the upper side portion 3A so as to face in the left-right direction. Further, on the back surface of the metal plate 222, an attachment member 223 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 is attached.

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so that the metal plate 222 can be covered from the back side, and the screw members N1 to N5 mounted from the back side to a plurality of mounting holes H1 to H5 facing in the front-rear direction are attached to the metal plate 222. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by being screwed into each of the formed plurality of screw holes. A plate-shaped first protruding portion 224 is projected rearward on the right side of the mounting member 223, and is composed of an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C on the left side of the mounting member 223. A three-dimensional second protruding portion 225 is projected rearward.

The first protruding portion 224 protrudes rearward from a position below the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225, and the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged on the upper side thereof. Further, a first guide passage forming portion 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall portion 225B of the second protruding portion 225, and a board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted on the upper side thereof. ing. The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side in the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper part in a state where the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. The screw member N6 is screwed into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223 to be mounted on the mounting member 223.

As described above, the mounting member 223 is formed so as to cover the upper part of the game board 2 by having the first protruding portion 224 and the second protruding portion 225 protruding rearward. Therefore, it is prevented that the game ball or the like supplied from the upper part of the game island to the ball tank forming portion 201 enters the game board 2. That is, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2.

The first passage forming body 203 has a plurality of screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of mounting holes H11 to H14 from the back side, and a plurality of screw members N15 attached to the mounting holes H15 from the upper side in the mounting member 223. It is attached to the attachment member 223 by being screwed into each screw hole. The screw member N12 to be attached to the mounting hole H12 is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 for removing the electricity charged in the first passage forming body 203 to the first passage forming body 203. Further, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper portion of the first passage forming body 203. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing the screw member N16 attached to the mounting hole H16 from above into the screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. There is.

As shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 8, the above-mentioned screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are composed of a male screw portion NS and a head NH, of which the screw members N1, N2 and N11 to N16 are heads. A flanged screw in which a flange portion F as a locking portion is integrally formed on the seat surface of the screw, and by widening the ground contact area of the seat surface and increasing the frictional force, it is harder to loosen than the screw members N3 to N6. It is a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of each of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 is about 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is about 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is the head NH. It is said to be about 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2 of.

The sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to the above-mentioned dimensions. Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 made of flanged screws are screw members in which a flange portion F (washer) is integrally formed, but instead of the flange portion F, a washer separate from the screw member. May be attached to the screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member shall include a member such as a screw or a bolt that is separated from the attached portion when loosened. Further, the loosening prevention portion also includes a rotation stopper portion of the head NH and an adhesive and the like formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer).

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage forming body 203 needs to receive and store the game balls supplied from above the game island by the ball tank forming portion 201, and also has the first guiding passage. In the above, the upper surface is formed in a concave shape so that the ball clogging is less likely to occur and the upper surface can be easily cleared when the ball clogging occurs.

Further, the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of the ball tank forming portion 201 where the game balls that overlap and stay in the vertical direction flow into the first guide passage forming portion 202. The game ball is arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the third cover body 330 at the position where the first guide passage forming portion 202 flows into the second guide passage forming portion 204. Is designed to be rectified. However, a part of the upper surface opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered by the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330, but the ball tank forming portion 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( The top opening of (see FIG. 27) is open.

On the other hand, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 to be attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223 are arranged in the vicinity of the periphery of the first passage forming body 203. Further, above the pachinko gaming machine 1 fixed to the gaming island, a screw member (not shown) for assembling a skeleton or the like constituting the gaming island, and various devices arranged inside the gaming island (for example,). A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishment device 150 and the like to the skeleton and the like, and a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members loosen and fall off due to vibration or impact generated in the gaming island or pachinko gaming machine 1, they will roll due to vibration or impact or opening and closing of the gaming machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first There is a possibility that it may fall inward from the uncovered region 350 of the guide passage forming portion 202 and be mixed into the guide passage of the game ball. In particular, the replenishment device 150 and the like are arranged in the vicinity directly above the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, and by sending a predetermined number of game balls to the ball tank forming portion 201, the game island Since it is a device that easily vibrates when a new gaming ball is supplied from the circulation path of the above or when the gaming machine frame 3 opens and closes, a screw member for attaching the replenishing device 150 to the skeleton of the gaming island ( (Not shown) or when a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishment device 150 loosen due to vibration and fall off, the inside of the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first induction passage forming portion 202. Very likely to fall into.

Then, when the screw member falls on the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member may move toward the payout device 200 side along with the flow of the game ball and finally be mixed in the payout device 200. When the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket and the switching valve are damaged by the screw member, the ball is clogged and the payout motor is loaded and malfunctions, or the screw member is a player together with the game ball. There was a risk that the player would feel uncomfortable or distrustful.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is mixed with the payout device 200, and the payout device 200 is damaged or malfunctions, or the screw member is formed together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to prevent the player from being paid out.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. 10A and 10B are a plan view showing a first passage forming body, and FIG. 10B is a rear view showing a first passage forming body. 11A is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10A, FIG. 11B is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 10A, and FIG. It is a figure. 12A and 12B are a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and FIG. 12B is a sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 12A. 13A and 13B are a plan view showing a first cover body, FIG. 13B is a sectional view taken along line EE of FIG. 13A, and FIG. 13C is a sectional view taken along line FF of FIG. 14A and 14B are a plan view showing a second cover body, FIG. 14B is a sectional view taken along line GG of FIG. 14A, and FIG. 14C is a sectional view taken along line HH of FIG. 14A. 15A and 15B are a plan view showing a third cover body, FIG. 15B is a sectional view taken along line II of FIG. 15A, FIG. 15C is a sectional view taken along line JJ of FIG. 3 The perspective view which shows the cover body, (E) is the perspective view which shows the ball stop member. 16A and 16B are vertical cross-sectional views showing a first guide passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball stop member is in the first state, and FIG. 16B is a first view showing a state in which the ball stop member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view which shows the guide passage formation part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material, and has an upper surface formed by a bottom wall portion 203A and a standing wall portion 203B erected on the peripheral edge of the bottom wall portion 203A. It has a ball tank forming portion 201 which is formed in a concave shape or a concave groove shape and is arranged on the right side, and a first guide passage forming portion 202 which is arranged on the left side. The ball tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed from an upstream portion extending diagonally rearward from the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. Become. The dimension of the ball tank forming portion 201 in the front-rear direction is longer than the dimension of the first guidance passage forming portion 202 in the front-rear direction, and more game balls can be stored than the first guidance passage forming portion 202. Has been done. Further, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually incline downward from the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the bottom wall portion 203A is supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201. The game ball naturally flows down with the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 facing the left side.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is projected on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 facing in the front-rear direction are vertically formed in the mounting piece 261. .. Further, a mounting piece 265 is projected from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and the mounting piece 265 is formed with a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is projected on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B on the left side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 is projected forward on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B on the front side of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 263.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing a plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into the screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. Further, a recess 280 having a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view is formed at a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, holes 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall portion 203A and the rear standing wall portion 203B in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 (the holes 270A and 270B are formed. (See FIG. 11 (A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed at substantially the center of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B toward the downstream side. Further, in the bottom wall portion 203A of the downstream end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, a connecting hole 272 for dropping the game ball is formed through the lower second guide passage forming portion 204. ..

In the middle of the first guide passage forming portion 202, a meandering portion 273 that causes the game ball to meander in the front-rear direction and flow down toward the left side is formed, and among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, the holes 271B to 271F are formed. Is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273. By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure due to the following ball is prevented from increasing.

Further, the separation dimension L10 of the lower portions of the standing wall portions 203B and 203B before and after the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (about 11 mm) of the game ball and twice the diameter (about 22 mm). It is shorter than (11 mm <L10 <22 mm). That is, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed so that the game ball can be guided in a row toward the downstream side.

Since the front-rear dimensions L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B are slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N3 to N6 described above (L11> L2), the screw members N3 to N3 to be described later. Even when N6 is mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can be dropped from the holes 271A to 271H. Further, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest left-right dimension L12 (dimension in the flow direction of the game ball) as compared with the other holes 271A to 271G, the screw members N3 to N6 are the connecting holes 272. Can be reliably dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching.

That is, these hole portions 271A to 271H form a specific restriction portion for restricting the movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200. Since dust, dust, or some other member other than the screw member can also fall from the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, it is possible to prevent ball clogging.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13 (A) to 13 (C), the first cover body 310 extends along the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and extends along the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. A mounting portion 311 having a U-shaped cross section that can be fitted from above, a standing wall portion 312 extending from the right side of the mounting portion 311 toward the rear side, and a vertical wall portion 312 extending from the lower side to the right side (ball tank formation). A plate-shaped ball holding portion 313 extending downward so as to be inclined downward toward the portion 201 side), and a cover portion 314 extending from the lower portion of the standing wall portion 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming portion 202 side). It is mainly composed of a plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D formed so as to be elastically deformable on the front side of the portion 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314.

In the first cover body 310 configured in this way, the mounting portion 311 is attached to the ball tank forming portion 201 in a state where the standing wall portion 312 is arranged near the boundary between the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. By fitting the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged so as to cover a part of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is one on the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The portion is covered from above, and the upper surface of the cover portion 314 is arranged so as to be slightly inclined downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 side (see FIG. 9).

In a state where the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming portion 201 side, so that the game island (not shown) becomes the ball tank forming portion 201. Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to be stacked in the vertical direction, when the game balls flow down to the first guide passage forming portion 202 side, they are rectified by being pressed downward by the ball holding portion 313. It is supposed to be done.

The cover portion 314 is formed with elongated holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction forming a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, penetrating vertically in a state of being arranged in a row so as to be parallel to each other. The front and rear dimensions L21 of each of the elongated holes 316A to 316C are all the same, and the front and rear dimensions L21 are shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21 <2R, L21 <L2). That is, the elongated holes 316A to 316C are formed in such a size that the game ball and the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 cannot be dropped. Reinforcing ribs hang down from the peripheral edges of the elongated holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314.

Further, since the elongated holes 316A to 316C are extended along the flow direction of the gaming ball, the gaming ball P falls above the elongated holes 316A to 316C as shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C. If so, the game ball P can move in the flow direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14 (A) to 14 (C), the second cover body 320 includes a plate-shaped cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and a cover portion. It is mainly composed of a plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B formed elastically deformably on the front and rear sides of the 324, and the right end portion of the cover portion 324 is attached to the left end portion of the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310. The first passage forming body 203 is formed by elastically locking the plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B to the locked portions 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 302B in a state of being close to each other. Can be attached to. In the attached state, the cover portion 324 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flow direction of the game ball (FIG. 9). reference).

Recessed grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 324 in a state of being arranged in a row with each other. The recessed grooves 326A to 326C have different front-rear dimensions L22A to L22C, but are shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A to L22C <2R). The front-rear dimension L22B of the central concave groove 326B having the longest front-rear dimension is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L22B> L2). That is, the concave groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate the game ball and can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L22B of the concave groove 326B is longer than the front-rear dimension L21 of the elongated holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B> L21).

Further, since the front-rear dimension L22A of the concave groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the concave groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B> L1, L22C> L1). ), At least the size is such that the male threaded portion NS can be accommodated.

Further, since the concave grooves 326A to 326C are extended along the flow direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the flow direction of the game ball, FIGS. 14 (B) and 14 (C) As shown in the above, when the game ball P falls on the upper part of the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the flow direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15 (A) to 15 (C) and FIG. 16, the third cover body 330 has a plate-shaped cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. , Mounting that is projected from above between a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D formed elastically deformably on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334 and the locking portions 335C and 335D on the back surface, and the screw member N15 is mounted from above. It is mainly composed of a mounting portion 331 formed with a hole H15 and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the upper left end portion of the cover portion 334, and a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D at the left end of the cover portion 324 stand on the wall. It is elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the portion 302B, and the screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the screw hole provided on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B. By entering, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flow direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a recess 336 having a predetermined depth extends from the right end portion on the upper surface toward the left side. Since a part on the right side approaches the meandering portion 273, it is formed corresponding to the shape of the meandering portion 273. Further, at the position corresponding to the recess 336, a slit 337 having a horizontally long U-shape in a plan view is formed, so that a rectifying plate 338 that can be elastically deformed so that the left end side swings in the vertical direction is formed. At the right end, an inclined plate portion 339 that inclines downward toward the right side is formed, so that the game balls P stacked vertically are leveled while being guided to be pressed against the bottom wall portion 203A. (See FIG. 16).

The front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L23). > 2R, L23> L2). That is, the recess 336 is formed in a size capable of accommodating the game ball P and the head NHs of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23> L22B).

Further, since the recess 336 is extended along the flow direction of the game ball and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flow direction of the game ball, the recess 336 is as shown in FIG. 15 (D). When the game ball P falls on the upper part of the 336, the game ball P is guided in the flow direction (left side).

Further, since the front-rear dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L24 <L2), the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 ~ N16 does not fall from the slit 337.

The ball stopper 340 includes a plate-shaped front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape in the rear view, a rear wall portion 341B arranged on the back side of the front wall portion 341A, and a front wall portion 341A and a rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating portion 341 having a left wall portion 341C to be connected, a protruding wall portion 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall portion 341C, and a cylindrical shaft portion 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing portions 343A and 343B that rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft portion 342 are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover portion 334. Further, a slit 344 into which the front wall portion 341A can be inserted is formed on the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334.

As shown in FIG. 16, when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the cover portion 324 covers the upper part of the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since the cover portion 324 is arranged so as to incline downward toward the downstream side (left side) so as to approach the bottom wall portion 203A, the game balls P stacked vertically in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are placed. It is leveled while flowing down so that it can finally flow out one by one from the connecting hole 272. In particular, since the rectifying plate 338 can be elastically deformed when the game balls come into contact with each other, the rectifying plate 338 is leveled (rectified) so as to push the game balls downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stop member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16A, the ball stopper 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating portion 341 stands up and an inclining position in which the rotating portion 341 tilts to the right, and the rotating portion 341 Is located in the upright position, and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the rotation. The portion 341 is located at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 cannot flow down (or flows down) to the second guide passage forming portion 204. It is possible to change to the second state (difficult), that is, the ball stop state.

By setting the ball stop member 340 in the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second guide passage forming portion 204. Therefore, in this state, the game in the second guide passage forming portion 204 It is possible to remove the ball and remove the payout device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the ball stopper 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C are formed. The space portion surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in a plan view functions as a retention portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can stay, as will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the ball stopper 340 is in the second state, the rotating portion 341 is tilted, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the protruding wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 based on FIG. 17A and 17B are perspective views showing a board mounting frame on which a terminal board is mounted, FIG. 17B is a KK cross section of (A), and FIG. 17C is an LL cross section of (B). ..

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and a cable connection portion (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 or the like is attached / detached to the back surface (not shown). ) And a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. A connection pinch (not shown) for sandwiching the tip of each cable C is provided at a position corresponding to each connection hole 231 inside the mounting member 232. A spring (not shown) for urging the connection pinch in the closing direction, that is, in the direction of sandwiching the tip of the cable C is provided. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation units 233 for releasing each connection pinch (not shown) against the urging force of the spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202 is the first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to the second substrate such as the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12 provided below the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the number of the second is less than the first number. The number (for example, 10) is set.

A plurality of the operation portions 233 are provided corresponding to the connection hole portions 231 and have a substantially hook shape in a side view, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end side thereof as a swing shaft. When opening the connection pinch (not shown) described above, the connection pinch (not shown) is released by pressing the operation unit 233 upward or downward to swing the operation unit 233. Then, when the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole 231 with the connection pinch open and the pressing operation of the operation unit 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the urging force of the spring (not shown). Cable C will be held. The operation units 233 arranged in the left-right direction have different shapes alternately in the left-right direction so that the adjacent operation units 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation when the predetermined operation unit 233 is pressed. There is.

The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side in the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper part in a state where the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. The screw member N6 is screwed into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223 to be mounted on the mounting member 223. Further, the substrate mounting frame 211 is formed with a horizontally long rectangular opening 234.

On the inner surface of the board mounting frame 211, a plurality of regulating portions 235 that regulate the forward movement of the terminal board 210 by locking to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 inserted from the front side, and the restricting portions 235 forward the terminal board 210. A plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 whose movement is restricted from the front side, and a positioning piece 237 that abuts on the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 to determine the arrangement position. Have. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and the locking portion 236 is elastically locked in a state where the forward movement is restricted by the plurality of regulating portions 235 to mount the terminal board. It is attached to the frame 211. That is, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a plurality of regulating portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members (by a mounting method different from the mounting method using the screw members). Can be installed.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which the cables C can be connected, the operation unit 233 corresponding to each cable C is formed during the wiring work for connecting the plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231. Need to be operated. Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island and the clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 for inspection or the like, the cable C hanging from the upper part of the game island is the outer frame. The connection may be tensioned by being routed forward of the 60. That is, since the terminal board 210 is likely to be loaded on the mounting portion, when the terminal board 210 is mounted on the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 by the screw member, the screw member loosens and easily comes off. ing.

Further, in a state where the terminal board 210 is mounted on the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole portion 231 and the operation portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the back side from the opening 234 (see FIG. 17 (A)). ). Further, since the plurality of operation units 233 project substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation units 233 arranged side by side as described later. Further, a recess 242 capable of accommodating the screw members N3 to N6 is formed between the lower portion of the terminal board 210 and the front portion of the board mounting frame 211.

(Attached state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting states of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame is viewed from diagonally behind. 19A is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame, and FIG. 19B is a sectional view taken along line MM of FIG. 19A. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame is viewed from diagonally behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame. 22A is a sectional view taken along the line NN of FIG. 21, FIG. 22B is a sectional view showing a rotational state of the screw member, and FIG. 22C is a sectional view taken along the line OO of FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP of FIG. 21, and FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ of FIG. FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR of FIG. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS of FIG. 26A and 26B show a retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, FIG. 26B is a sectional view taken along the line TT of FIG. 26A, and FIG. 26C is a second state of the ball stopper. The staying state of the screw member at the time of (D) is a sectional view taken along line UU of (C). FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion.

As shown in FIGS. 9, 18 and 19 (A), the ball tank forming portion 201 on the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3 and its periphery are screw members N1 to for mounting the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222. Screw members N11, N12, and N15 for attaching N2 and the first passage forming body 203 to the attachment member 223 are attached.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached to the right side from the ball tank forming portion 201 and from the back side to the front at a position below the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B in the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 loosen due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and fall out rearward, it is extremely unlikely that they will fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. ..

Because the screw members N11 and N12 are attached from the back side to the front on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper end edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 loosen due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and fall out rearward, it is extremely unlikely that they will fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG.

Since the screw member N15 is attached from the upper side to the lower side on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position lower than the upper end edge of the ball tank forming portion 201, pachinko game Even if the screw member N15 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the machine 1 and falls off upward, it is extremely unlikely that the screw member N15 will fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 form a ball tank in which the game balls supplied by the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island are received and stored, and the load of a large number of game balls is applied. Since it is arranged around the portion 201, vibration and impact are likely to occur. Therefore, a threaded member with a flange is used because the contact area with the attached portion is large and loosening is unlikely to occur.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the ball tank forming portion 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 even if they loosen and fall off, that is, the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201. Since it is arranged below, it may be mixed into the ball tank forming portion 201 which opens upward to receive and store the game balls supplied by the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. It is suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the ball tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-shaped first protruding portion 224 that protrudes rearward in the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first protruding portion 224 is shorter than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw member (L30 <L1), so that the bottom It is unlikely that the screw member is sandwiched between the wall portion 203A and the first protruding portion 224 and is held in the vicinity of the ball tank forming portion 201.

Further, the gap L31 formed between the rear portion of the bottom wall portion 203A of the ball tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is formed from the head L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F. (L3> L2), the flanged screw member is hardly caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the ball tank forming portion 201.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 (B), if the screw member N15 falls out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounted portion and falls on the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H becomes Since the screw member N15 that has fallen flows down to either the rear or the left because it is inclined downward toward the back surface side, it is hardly held in the vicinity of the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member N15 from being mixed into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, 91A provided below the ball tank forming portion 201 and contacting the wiring of the substrate to cause disconnection or the like. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20 and 21 (A), screw members N3 to N5 for mounting the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and a substrate are provided in and around the first guide passage forming portion 202. The screw member N6 for mounting the mounting frame 211 on the mounting member 223, the screw members N13 and N14 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 on the mounting member 223, and the third cover body 330 are attached to the first guiding passage forming portion 202. A screw member N16 for attaching to the screw member N16 is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front side and are directed from the back side to the front at a position above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B in the first guide passage forming portion 202. The screw member is mounted by arranging the second protruding portion 225 of the mounting member 223 between the mounting positions of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the first guide passage forming portion 202 is separated to some extent from the mounting positions of each of N3 to N6, the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so that the pachinko gaming machine When the screw members N3 to N6 loosen and fall out rearward due to the vibration or impact generated in 1, the screw members N3 to N6 move rearward on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A corresponding to the mounting hole H3, a concave groove 227 for avoiding interference with the head NH when the screw member N3 is mounted on the mounting hole H3 is linear toward the rear. It is extended to. The concave groove 227 is formed so that the left and right widths are tapered toward the rear side and become shallower. However, since the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A is inclined downward toward the back side, the concave groove is formed. The bottom surface of the 227 is substantially horizontal (or slightly inclined downward toward the back surface side).

Therefore, if the screw member N3 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N3 will fall into the concave groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 (FIG. FIG. 22 (A)). Further, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the concave groove 227 is likely to be guided so as to move linearly toward the rear when vibration or impact occurs, but the concave groove 227 is substantially horizontal toward the rear. The screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in regions other than the concave groove 227. That is, the concave groove 227 constitutes a special limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member N3 moving toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to the first guiding passage forming portion 202.

Here, all the screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of the head NH and the male screw portion NS, and when they fall on the upper surface of the flat upper wall portion 225A, the peripheral edge of the head NH and the male screw portion NS Since the screw member N3 tilted as shown in FIG. 22 (B) is often in a tilted posture when the two points are in contact with the tip (see FIG. 22 (A)), vibration or impact occurs. Occasionally, the head NH may rotate around the tip of the male screw portion NS so as to swing its head, and its direction may change. Therefore, if it falls on a flat surface other than the concave groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the concave groove 227, it may move linearly toward the rear or the head. The NH may move to turn to the left or right by rotating like shaking its head. That is, as shown by an arrow in FIG. 20, when it moves so as to bend to the right toward the rear, it is highly likely that it falls on the first cover body 310, and when it moves linearly toward the rear, it is the first. There is a high possibility that the cover body 320 will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 in front of the first guide passage when the cover body 320 is moved so as to bend to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the concave groove 227 and then moves so as to bend rearward to the right, the first cover body. There is a high possibility that it will fall onto the cover portion 314 of 310. As shown in FIG. 22 (A), when the screw member N3 falls on the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male screw portion NS intersects the elongated holes 316A to 316C, or the male screw portion NS becomes Although it is inserted into any of the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the head NH is locked without falling off, so that the head NH does not fall from the cover portion 314 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 and stays on the cover portion 314. Will be done. That is, the elongated holes 316A to 316C cause the screw member N3 that has fallen onto the cover portion 314 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiting unit for limiting.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end and then linearly moved rearward, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage is formed. There is a high possibility that it will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 of the body 203. As shown in FIG. 22C, when the screw member N3 falls on the cover portion 324, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male screw portion NS intersects the concave grooves 326A to 326C, or the male screw portion NS or the like. Since a part of the head NH is housed in the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the head NH does not fall from the cover portion 324 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 but stays on the cover portion 324. That is, the concave grooves 326A to 326C cause the screw member N3 that has fallen onto the cover portion 324 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiting unit for limiting.

Further, when the product falls on the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B of the second protruding portion 225 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is placed on the horizontal wall portion 264. It stays in a state of being inclined to. That is, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is arranged between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, so that the upper wall portion Since the recess 290 that opens upward is formed by the 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B, and the horizontal wall portion 264, the recess 290 is accommodated and stays in the recess 290. That is, the recess 290 is a screw member provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the fall of N3 to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N13 is separated forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and slightly above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B in the first passage forming body 203. It is mounted in the mounting hole H13 formed in the mounting piece 263, which is the position. Therefore, if the screw member N13 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, it may fall into the recess 280 formed in the vicinity of the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. High (see FIG. 23 (A)). Specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is arranged between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, whereby the upper wall portion Since a recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 opened upward by the 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264, it is accommodated and stays in the recess 280. Become.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23 (B), when the screw member N13 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls off rearward, it is arranged on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. It may fall and stay in the recess 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211. That is, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and is a screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the fall of N13 to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H4. Therefore, if the screw member N4 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N4 will fall onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 24, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves rearward so as to bend to the right, or linearly moves rearward. In any case of moving so as to bend to the right, as shown in FIG. 24, the board mounting frame 211 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A. The screw member N4 that has fallen from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and is accommodated and stays in the recess 242 formed by the substrate mounting frame 211 and the terminal substrate 210, or the substrate mounting frame. Although the male screw portion NS is inserted into the recess 243 formed between the 211 and the vertical wall portion 203B, the head NH may stay because it is locked without falling off. That is, the recess 242 and the recess 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the fall of the screw member N4 to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation units 233. Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, a plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 hang down from the upper part of the game island (see FIG. 3). C may prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. That is, the operation unit 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the falling of the screw member N4 that has been made to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves so as to bend rearward and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body is opened at the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The first guide passage forming portion 202 from the uncovered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, which is not covered by any of the 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330. Fall into. The screw member N4 that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P, falls out from between the game balls, and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. It falls from any of the holes 271B to 271D formed at the position corresponding to the uncovered region 350 in the guide passage forming portion 202 and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, even if it does not fall from any of the holes 271B to 271D, it finally falls from any of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. That is, the holes 271A to 271H form a specific restriction portion for restricting the movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200.

On the other hand, when the screw member N4 slips out of the mounting hole H4 and moves so as to bend to the left toward the rear and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, it is placed on the recess 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By falling, the cover portion 334 does not fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202, but is housed in the recess 336 and stays there. That is, the recess 336 is for limiting the drop of the screw member N4 that has fallen on the cover portion 334 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Consists of a predetermined restriction part of.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the substrate mounting frame 211 at a position forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls off rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N6 will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided to move linearly rearward by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward. After that, when it moves so as to bend to the right side, as shown in FIG. 25, it falls to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper 340 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. As described with reference to FIG. 16, the cover portion 334 covers the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to incline downward toward the downstream side (payout device 200 side), so that the cover portion 334 is on the cover portion 334. The screw member N6 that has fallen to a position near the upstream side of the ball fixing member 340 in the above is likely to move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved to the downstream side comes into contact with the ball stopper 340 provided at the downstream side end portion (left end portion) that is the lower side of the cover portion 334, and is brought into contact with the downstream side (the left end portion). By restricting the movement to the left side), it stays on the cover portion 334.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stopper 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B are opened. Since the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the wall portion having a substantially U-shape in a plan view composed of the left wall portion 341C, the screw member N6 is held without dropping from the cover portion 334. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26 (C) and 26 (D), when the ball stopper 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage, so that the screw member N6 is inserted into the protruding wall. Since it can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without dropping from the cover portion 334.

In the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is only arranged so as to intersect with respect to the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may fall backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front and rear left sides of the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted are covered with the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C. It can be more reliably retained than in the second state where the left wall portion 341C is located only on the left side. That is, the ball stopper 340 is provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the tilt direction of the cover portion 334, and constitutes a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 that has fallen on the cover portion 334 in the cover portion 334. doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N5 is separated from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front right side in the mounting member 223, and is located above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Although it is attached to the formed mounting hole H5, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not arranged directly behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is also cut in the middle. Since it has been scratched, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backward, it falls on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225, but before reaching the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a high possibility that the upper wall portion 225A will fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the screw member N16 is attached to the mounting hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and below the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N5 will fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. ..

(Action / effect)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a screw member provided at a position above the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3. N3 to N6, etc. come off due to loosening caused by vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and move backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibration or impact or opening / closing of the gaming machine frame 3, and then cover. When it falls on the portions 314, 324 and 334, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the recess 336 and the ball stopper 340 restrict the drop to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since there is a high possibility that the cover portions 314, 324 and 334 will stay on the cover portions 314, 324 and 334 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It is possible to prevent the members from moving and being mixed into the payout device 200. Further, since a vertical wall portion is formed at the left (downstream side) end of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves to the left side, it enters the first guide passage forming portion 202. Can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28, on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the regions other than the uncovered region 350 are covered by the cover portions 314, 324 and 334, but the ball tank forming portion 201 Even if the replenished game ball spills and gets on the cover parts 314 and 324 on the upstream side, the front-rear dimensions of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C are from the diameter 2R of the game ball P. The game ball P rolls to the left side, then falls from the left end of the cover portion 324 to the uncovered region 350, and is returned to the inside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Therefore, not only can the game ball that has been placed on the cover portions 314 and 324 be returned to the inside of the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also the game ball P stays in the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the dropped screw member N stays is limited, or the falling screw member N comes into contact with the staying game ball and falls from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Can be prevented.

When the game ball falls on the cover portion 334, it flows down on the cover portion 334 toward the left side and the flow is regulated by the ball stop member 340, or it falls out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. To do.

Further, in the elongated holes 316A to 316C as the first retaining portion and the concave grooves 326A to 326C as the second retaining portion, the concave groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the elongated holes 316A to 316C. The front-rear dimension L22B is larger than the front-rear dimension L22 of the elongated hole 316B (L22B> L21). By doing so, the screw member tends to stay in the retention portion as it approaches the payout device 200, so that the screw member that has fallen on the cover portions 314 and 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It can be prevented from doing so.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and stayed on the cover portions 314, 324 and 334 move due to vibration or impact, and are not covered provided between the cover portion 324 and the cover portion 334. When it falls from the area 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A like the screw member N4, the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the uncovered area 350. Even if it falls directly inward, it falls out from between the game balls and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A while moving toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P in the first guide passage forming portion 202. As a result, the screw member falls from any of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves to the payout device 200. It is possible to suppress mixing.

Further, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the middle flow portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion in the first guide passage forming portion 202, and are formed in the ball tank forming portion 201. There is a region in which no hole is formed between the holes 270A and 270B formed at close positions and the hole 271A on the most upstream side of the holes 271A to 271H. As described above, since a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed is formed in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming portion 201 flow down in a vertically stacked state. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in strength of the bottom wall portion 203A near the upstream portion in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to which the ball pressure is applied.

Further, by forming the region in which the hole portion is not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this way, the screw member dropped from the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220. It is possible to appropriately suppress the entry into the inside of the cover body 220 from the heat radiation hole 220B (see FIG. 6) or the like.

Further, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the regions where the holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202. Can be suppressed from falling, and the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 can be prevented from being mixed into the payout device 200 without falling to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. be able to.

Further, since the largest hole 271H among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, the screw member can be preferably removed from the hole 271H outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350, the game ball is formed in the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350. The screw members are often located at the upper part of the game ball because the screws are stacked one above the other, but the hole 271H is arranged on the downstream side of the straightening vane 338 of the cover portion 334, that is, Since the game ball is arranged at a position where it is rectified in one upper and lower stages, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, since at least some of the holes 271B to 271D among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is not covered. Even if it is mixed from the region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be dropped from the holes 271B to 271D to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, at least some of the holes 271B to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided on the payout device 200 side of the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, as described above. Even when the game ball that has fallen from the uncovered area 350 to the first guide passage forming portion 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it approaches downward while moving along with the flow of the game ball and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Since the probability of this is high, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 are referred to the first guide passage forming portion. The recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 as special retention portions that can be retained before reaching 202 are below the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the mounting holes H3 to H6 as the attachment portions. The screw members N3 to N6, which are provided in the above and are separated from the mounting holes H3 to H6 but do not stay in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242 and 243, can be moved toward the cover portions 314, 324 and 334. It is possible to prevent the screw members N3 to N6 detached from the mounting holes H3 to H6 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, since the depths of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are the depths at which a part of the screw members N3 to N6 protrudes when the screw members N3 to N6 are accommodated, the recesses 280, 290, The screw members N3 to N6 staying in 214, 242, and 243 can be easily taken out.

Further, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and the recessed 336 restrict the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Not only (or obstructing), but also because it is a retention portion that can be retained outside the first guide passage forming portion 202, a clerk of a game hall or the like finds a screw member when performing an inspection or the like. Since it becomes possible to identify which screw member has come off, it becomes easy to take measures against mixing of the screw member into the dispensing device 200.

Further, in the ball stopping member 340 as the specific portion, the rotating portion 341 is located in the upright position, the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344, and the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is guided to the second guide. In the first state where the passage forming portion 204 can flow down, the rotating portion 341 is located at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 It is possible to change to the second state in which the game ball cannot flow down (or is difficult to flow down) to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the first state is when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state. Since the screw member is more likely to stay than in the above case, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

More specifically, as described above, the ball stop member 340 is set to the second state when the game balls in the first guide passage and the second guide passage are taken out, that is, the clerk of the game hall or the like is a pachinko gaming machine. While the inspection and maintenance work of 1 is performed, the ball stopper 340 is set to the first state when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the operating state, that is, when the clerk of the game hall cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the screw member from being mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

Further, the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of places by screw members N11 to N14 having a flange portion F as a locking portion, and the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 are attached. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the above to the gaming machine frame 3 fall out of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 even if they are separated from the gaming machine frame 3, so that the first guiding passage forming portion 202 and the ball It is attached at a position below the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201. Therefore, since the screw members N11 to N14 for mounting the ball tank forming portion 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the gaming ball, they are hard to come off from the gaming machine frame 3 as a flanged screw member, while the ball tank forming portion 201 and the ball tank forming portion 201 and Even if the screw members N11 to N14 that attach the first guide passage forming portion 202 are removed, they fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is a payout device 200. It can be prevented from being mixed in.

Further, among a plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member (for example, the screw member N12) near the peripheral edge portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 ) Is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the screw member (number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from being mixed into the payout device 200. Instead of the ground wire, it may also be used as a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the gaming machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached. Since 201 can be firmly attached and vibration is less likely to occur, loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

Further, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3 are screw members having no flange portion F and having a small diameter of the head NH. Even if it falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be easily dropped from the holes 271A to 271H, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member from being mixed in the dispensing device 200.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19B and 27, a screw member that has fallen is placed rearward in a region below the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game board 2 that can be attached to and detached from the gaming machine frame 3. Alternatively, the cover body 220 is provided with an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down to the payout device 200 side with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202. It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the upper wall portion 220H from bouncing and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Further, although not particularly shown, the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward from the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and fall onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220. By guiding the screw member to flow backward or toward the payout device 200 side, the screw member that has fallen on the upper wall portion 220H is prevented from falling into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, 91A arranged below. Can be prevented.

Further, the cover body 220 is generated from these drive sources by being provided so as to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the effect device having a movable body, and the effect control board 12. Although a plurality of heat radiating holes 220B for releasing heat are formed on the upper part of the rear wall portion (see FIG. 6), these heat radiating holes 220B have at least the head even if the male screw portion NS of the screw member can be inserted. It is preferable that the size is such that NH cannot be inserted. Further, since there is a high possibility that the screw member falls from the upper holes 270A, 270B, 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H arranged directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiating hole 220B is provided. It is preferable that the upper wall portion 220H is formed at a position that does not correspond to the holes 270A, 270B, 271A to 271H, or is formed at a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, a rear wall portion). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and adversely affecting the image display device 5, the effect device having a movable body, the effect control board 12, and the like.

(Modification example 1)
Next, a modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 29. 29A and 29B are a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and FIG. 29 is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion.

In the above-described embodiment, the guide passage forming portion for forming the guide passage for guiding the game ball of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 is extended so as to be inclined downward toward the left side. The first guide passage forming portion 202 has a guide passage forming portion 202 and a second guide passage forming portion 204 extending downward from the lower left end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface thereof is provided so that the ball stopper 340 projects upward on the upper surface of the left end portion. In the present invention, a mode in which the screw member N moving on the cover portion 334 to the left side is received and can be retained has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover portion of the present modification 1 is not limited to this. Like 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the lower second guide passage forming portion 204.

By doing so, when the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen on the cover portion 360 move toward the left end portion side, they do not stay on the cover portion 360 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since the screw member N falls directly from the left end portion of the screw member N to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (B), in the case where the recess 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 360, the third recess 361 in the cover portion 360 is located near the recess 361. 1 The cable CH may be provided so as to intersect the flow direction of the game ball in the guide passage forming portion 202.

By doing so, the screw member N and the game ball P that have accumulated in the recess 361 but may move due to the inclination can be retained by restricting the movement by the cable C.

(Explanation of deformation and application)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, as the screw members, the screw members N1-6, N11-16 for attaching the attachment member 223, the first passage forming body 203, and the like to the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the pachinko machine. Screw members (not shown) that are attached to other parts of the gaming machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the skeletons that make up the gaming island, and various devices (for example, not shown) that are placed inside the gaming island. , Replenishment device 150, etc.), etc.) have been exemplified for screw members (not shown) for attaching to the skeleton, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. All screw members such as screw members that have remained in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason, such as forgetting to install them during on-site maintenance, can be targeted, but at least they are pre-installed in the pachinko game machine 1. It is preferable that the screw member can be prevented from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a box-shaped ball tank forming portion 201 having an upper surface opened by the bottom wall portion 203A and the standing wall portion B is applied as a storage portion capable of storing the game medium. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the storage unit can store the game ball, the front-rear dimension is larger than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202 like the ball tank forming portion 201. It does not have to be long, and may have substantially the same or shorter front-rear dimensions as the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, the upper surface does not necessarily have to be open as long as it can receive the game ball supplied from the replenishment device 150.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a payout device 200 capable of paying out a game ball by a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit capable of paying out a game medium has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited thereto. It may be a payout device capable of paying out a game ball by a member other than a sprocket.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper surface is opened, and the upper surface is opened by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B as a guide passage forming portion for forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the discharge portion. An example is an example in which the first guide passage forming portion 202 formed in a groove shape is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide is composed of a tubular member having an opening formed in a part of the upper surface. It may be a passage forming portion, and its shape, size, and the like can be changed in various ways. The width dimension (front-rear dimension) may be substantially the same as or larger than that of the ball tank forming portion 201, and the game balls may be guided in a plurality of rows so as to be able to flow down.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion capable of storing the game ball and the first guide passage having the upper surface open and guiding the game ball of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the embodiment in which the first guide passage forming portion 202 to be formed is integrally molded is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 are separately formed. The members may be integrally formed by assembling the members with screw members or the like. In this case, the screw member for assembling the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is also the target of the screw member of the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a screw member can be mixed from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not limited thereto. A screw member may be mixed from a hole, a notch, or the like formed on the standing wall side of the above. Further, when the screw member can be mixed in the second guide passage forming portion 204, the predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member to the second guide passage forming portion 204 or the second guide passage forming portion 204 A specific restriction portion or the like for restricting the movement of the dropped screw member to the dispensing device 200 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire region of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be covered with the cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover portion covering a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed of a member separate from the first guide passage forming portion 202. It may be formed integrally with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. That is, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a square tubular shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member stays on the cover portion as a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion 314, 324, 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Examples of a form in which elongated holes 316A to 316C as holes that can be formed and recessed grooves 326A to 326C and recesses 336 as recesses are applied have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member is not limited to this. A fall control part (fall inhibition part) that can regulate (or hinder) the fall from the cover part, and a movement regulation part (movement obstruction part) that can regulate (or hinder) the movement of the screw member on the cover part. Alternatively, it may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to be able to fall. As a means capable of regulating or hindering the drop or movement, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adsorbing the screw member, and the like may be used.

That is, the predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member that has fallen on the cover portions 314, 324 and 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is the fall of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Anything that can make it difficult to fall, as well as something that makes it impossible to fall.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, there are a plurality of specific restriction units provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to restrict the movement of the screw member dropped on the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200. Although the embodiment in which the holes 271A to 271H are applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200 side is restricted ( Alternatively, it may be a movement control unit (movement inhibition unit) capable of (inhibition). As a means capable of restricting or hindering the movement to the payout device 200 side, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adsorbing the screw member, and the like. These may be provided at positions that do not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, a corner portion between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B, which is not in contact with the game ball).

That is, the specific restriction unit provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member dropped on the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200 is the screw member payout device 200. If the movement to the side can be restricted, not only the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 cannot be moved to the payout device 200 side, but also the movement can be made difficult. Anything is fine.

Further, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (regulated, hindered) by the specific limiting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the movement is restricted. There is a high possibility that the ball is clogged because the flow of the game ball is also restricted by the screw member that is restricted and stays in the first guide passage. When the ball is clogged, the replenishment error notification is executed as described above, so that the clerk of the game hall opens the frame 3 for the game machine to form the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage on the back surface. There is a high possibility that the state of the game ball in the unit 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member does not move to the payout device 200 but stays in the first guide passage forming portion 202, it becomes easy for the store clerk or the like to identify that the cause of the ball clogging was the screw member. Appropriate measures can be taken.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the plurality of holes 271A to 271H all have a size capable of dropping the screw member is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A are not limited thereto. As long as at least two or more holes of ~ 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes need not be able to drop the screw member. Further, the shapes and sizes of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary, and are not limited to the above-mentioned forms and can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12 are applied as the first substrate to be mounted below the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is limited thereto. Other substrates such as a relay substrate may also be targeted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the terminal substrate 210 is applied as the second substrate mounted at a position above the first guide passage forming portion 202 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , Other substrates such as a relay substrate may be targeted as the second substrate.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board exemplify a form in which the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are housed are attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various substrates as the first substrate may be directly attached to the gaming board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3 without passing through the substrate case.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12 as the first substrate, the substrate cases 11A and 12A in which the respective substrates are housed are the screw members N20 and N21, that is, the screw members are used. The terminal board 210, which is mounted on the game board 2 by the mounting method and serves as the second board, uses a locking means including a plurality of regulating portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members, that is, Although the embodiment of mounting on the board mounting frame 211 by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and a locking means using a latch member or the like, a caulking pin or the like is used. It may include an attachment means, an adhesive means such as an adhesive, and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member provided around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 is restricted from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202. A form in which the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied has been illustrated as a special limiting portion for forming the screw member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member has a first guide passage forming portion 202. A drop control section (fall blocker) that can regulate (or hinder) the fall of the screw member, and a movement control section (movement blocker) that can regulate (or block) the movement of the screw member to the first guide passage forming section 202. , It may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to be able to fall. As a means capable of restricting or hindering the fall or movement of the first guide passage forming portion 202, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member and a screw member can be adhered. It may be an adhesive part or the like.

That is, the special restriction portion for restricting the fall of the detached screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not only the one that prevents the screw member from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also Anything that can make it difficult to fall will do. For example, a convex portion as a drop restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion), a concave portion or a hole portion as a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion), or the like may be provided at a predetermined position such as the upper wall portion 225A.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 provided with the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 and the like as the special limiting portion is located near the standing wall portion 203B on the front side. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least between the mounted portion (mounting hole) to which the screw member is mounted and the guide passage forming portion, the present invention is not necessarily provided at a position near the standing wall portion 203B. For example, it may be provided between the attached portion of the screw member and the guide passage forming portion at a position closer to the attached portion than the guide passage forming portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first is a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 that has fallen on the cover portion 334 on the payout device 200 side in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334 in the cover portion 334. An example has been made in which a ball-stopping member 340 that can be changed is applied to a first state in which the game ball of the guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down and a second state in which the game ball cannot flow down or cannot flow down. Not limited to this, if the member is provided on the payout device 200 side (inclination lower side) in the tilt direction of the cover portion 334, the movement of the screw member is restricted even if it does not have the ball fixing function. It may be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, a wiring retainer, or the like that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball-stopping member 340 as a specific portion is provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, the specific portion may be provided at the end of the cover portion 314,324 on the payout device 200 side as long as it is provided at the end of the cover portion on the payout device 200 side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the ball-stopping member 340 as the specific portion is composed of a member separate from the cover portion 334 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific portion (ball stopper) may be integrally formed on a part of the members constituting the cover portion 334.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the locking portion, the flange portion F (washer) having a diameter larger than that of the head NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head NH. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the flange portion F, a washer or the like that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or a head. It also includes a rotating stopper and an adhesive for the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer). Further, the screw member is not limited to a member that can be attached by a tool such as a screwdriver, but may be a thumbscrew, and includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that is detached from the attached portion when loosened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion is attached to the game machine frame 3 at a plurality of places by screw members N11 to N14 having a flange portion F as a locking portion to form a ball tank. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3 fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 even if they are separated from the game machine frame 3. , A mode in which the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the ball tank forming portion 201 are attached at a position lower than the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first Even if the position is above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the guide passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, the position is shifted in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201. If it is attached to a non-directly above position, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling directly onto the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, the dropped screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guiding portion (for example, a concave groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A) or the like. May be good.

Further, the predetermined limiting portion, the specific limiting portion, the special limiting portion, and the specific portion in the above embodiment are not only the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but also pachinko games such as a game island. Although the embodiment of restricting or restricting (inhibiting) the movement of the screw member other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is attached to at least the pachinko gaming machine 1. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200. (Inhibition) It is preferable that it is formed in a possible size and morphology.

(Feature unit 053SG)
Next, a mode for carrying out the gaming machine in the feature unit 053SG according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The game machine in the feature unit 053SG is a pachinko game machine installed in a game hall or the like, a slot machine, or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. 30-1, a game control microcomputer for controlling the game is mounted. It is equipped with a game control board. As the game machine described below, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can be applied, the main board 11 of the above embodiment can be applied to the game control board, and the effect control board 12 can be applied to the effect control board. Is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting the input status according to the progress of the game are connected to the game control board. Input parts include, for example, a detection switch that detects an operation by a player, a detection switch that detects the passage of a game medium such as a game ball or a medal, a sensor that identifies a movable object used in a game such as a reel, and a player. It is a detection switch used for various settings such as the advantage of the reel, and a detection switch for detecting the opening of a door or an abnormality.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is equipped with an input circuit for detecting input signals from these input components, and the detection status of the input signal from the input components by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and is used to control the game by the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, a plurality of output components that control output according to the progress of the game, such as a display, an LED, a motor, and a solenoid, are connected to the game control board. The output parts are, for example, a display that displays according to the lottery result, a display that displays the progress of the game and the state of the game machine, a display that instructs the player on the operation mode, and a value owned by the player. A display that displays the game status, an LED that indicates the game status, an LED that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor that operates a movable part used for a game such as a reel or a variable winning device, a solenoid, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The game control microcomputer controls the output components according to the progress of the game by transmitting the output data to the output circuit.

Further, the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, and the input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The output data of is transmitted via a shared data bus.

Also, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some input circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus, and the shared data bus is used. The input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through.

The output circuits are all connected via a shared data bus, but some output circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus and are shared. The output data may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without going through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to the external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to the external device as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance of the gaming machine using the output data output as.

Next, the game control board included in the game machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the game control board in the first embodiment will be described. The game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, electronic components are not mounted on the other surface, and terminals provided by the electronic components are soldered. In the following, electronic components are mounted. The surface is called a mounting surface, and the surface on which electronic components are not mounted and the terminals of the electronic components are soldered is called a soldered surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing a mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing a solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board is a rectangular printed circuit board composed of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has insulating properties. Consists of. Further, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes penetrating the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board are composed of conductors so as to appropriately connect the through holes. A plurality of the above-mentioned wiring patterns are formed. Further, in the region where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board is not formed, an insulating region made of an insulator and a conductor are formed, and a ground region forming a ground is formed. The ground region is a betta land formed over almost the entire area other than the region where the wiring pattern and the insulating region are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board.

As shown in FIG. 30-2, more wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are arranged on the mounting surface than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction, while the solder surface is arranged as shown in FIG. 30-3. There are more wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are aggregated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are aggregated on the solder surface, and when the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction intersect. Designs such as bypassing wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-3, since many wiring patterns arranged on the solder surface extend in the same lateral direction as the long side, the distance of the wiring pattern is longer than that of the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, the electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the solder surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface is hindered by the electronic components. Is avoided.

Further, when the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface is branched, one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through hole. Branching is performed without bypassing one wiring pattern or crossing one wiring pattern and the other wiring pattern at the branch destination on the same surface.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing a mounting surface in a state where the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the above-mentioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include an electronic component having one or more rows of terminals consisting of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components including these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in the horizontal direction. As described above, on the mounting surface, the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction is large, and the electronic components provided with the terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged in the horizontal direction. By doing so, it is possible to connect to the terminal rows arranged in the horizontal direction as it is without changing the direction of the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction.

Further, among the electronic components including the terminal train, the input circuit and the output circuit are formed in a rectangular shape as shown in FIG. 30-4, and a concave notch is provided on one of the short sides and the surface thereof is provided. The model number is printed, and the orientation of the component can be specified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. Then, as shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side and the model number is printed in the direction from left to right in FIG. 30-4, while the output circuit is arranged. , In Fig. 30-4, the notch is arranged to the right and the printing direction of the model number is from right to left, and these electronic components are arranged in the input circuit depending on the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. It is possible to identify whether it is an output circuit or an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing a configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-6 is a diagram from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the branched wiring pattern.

As described above, the game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. .. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns formed on the solder surface extending in the lateral direction, and as shown in FIG. 30-5, the game control board of the game control board. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from the through hole to which the terminal of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side is connected. As shown in FIG. 30-6, the data bus and the electronic components such as the input circuit and the output circuit are branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole, and the wiring pattern is formed so as to extend in the vertical direction. Connected by.

When connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated in the lateral direction via a data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the lateral direction. It is connected to the data bus on the surface, branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side that extends vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at the position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer and the electronic components separated in the lateral direction can be efficiently connected. Further, since the wiring pattern constituting the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which the electronic components are not mounted, it is not easily affected by the noise from the electronic components on the data bus, and the data bus and the electronic components are through. Since they are connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the hole, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and the influence of noise from electronic components during this period is not easily affected.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the wiring patterns extending in the lateral direction constituting the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but are divided into a plurality of wiring patterns extending in the lateral direction. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is an antenna whose resonance is maximized according to the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed shorter than the length (λ (bus clock) / 2). Therefore, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus has an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, and it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length is halved of the antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, it may be reflected on the surface of the substrate and strong resonance may occur. Therefore, the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) are formed to have a length that is not 1/2 of the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock, and strong resonance occurs due to reflection on the surface of the substrate. It is also prevented from emitting radio waves.

Further, the bus clock differs depending on the game control microcomputer and the oscillator to be mounted, but the lengths (L1 to L8) of each divided wiring pattern depend on the bus clock which is the maximum frequency expected among them. It is formed so as to be shorter than the antenna length at which the resonance is maximized, and not to be half the antenna length at which the resonance is maximized according to the bus clock at the maximum frequency. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock lower than the expected maximum frequency, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being generated.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the plurality of lateral wiring patterns constituting the data bus are diagonally right or diagonally left, that is, the direction of the plurality of lateral wiring patterns. They are connected across wiring patterns that extend in different directions. Further, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction and the wiring pattern in the diagonally right direction or the diagonally left direction, which are divided into a plurality of parts, are connected by being bent at an obtuse angle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-5, it is mounted through a through hole (A to F shown in FIGS. 30-5) provided on the diagonal wiring pattern connecting the plurality of lateral wiring patterns. It is designed to branch into a wiring pattern on the surface side (wiring pattern connected to A to F shown in FIGS. 30-6), and is a diagonal wiring pattern that connects a plurality of horizontal wiring patterns divided into each other. The wiring patterns that make up the data bus are branched using.

In the game control board according to the first embodiment, in order to make the length of the horizontal wiring pattern shorter than the antenna length at which the resonance is maximized, the horizontal wiring pattern is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns, and a plurality of wiring patterns are divided into a plurality of wiring patterns. The horizontal wiring patterns divided into the above are connected by the diagonal wiring patterns formed on the same solder surface, but the plurality of horizontal wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface side. As a configuration in which horizontal wiring patterns are connected by a separate wiring pattern, that is, horizontal wiring patterns are alternately formed on a solder surface and a mounting surface so that the length of the horizontal wiring pattern is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized. Is also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch at a position where the horizontal wiring pattern switches from the solder surface or the mounting surface to the other surface. With such a configuration, the wiring pattern after branching can be bypassed. , It is possible to branch the wiring patterns constituting the data bus without intersecting on the same plane.

FIG. 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground region formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-8 is a diagram formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area.

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, a ground region is formed over almost the entire area other than the region where the wiring pattern and the insulating region are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board. The ground region formed on the game control board is composed of a first ground region and a second ground region electrically separated by an insulating region. On both the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground region is formed in the region on the left side of the game control board, and the second ground region is formed in the region on the right side of the game control board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-7, wiring patterns for transmitting low voltage (Vcc (+ 5V) in this embodiment) signals such as a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, and an output circuit are connected. The electronic component (low voltage component) is mounted in the left region where the first ground region is formed, and the ground terminal of the low voltage component is connected to the first ground region. On the other hand, electronic components (high-voltage components) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high-voltage (VLD (+ 24V) in this embodiment) signals, such as drive circuits for operating motors and solenoids, are connected are the first. It is mounted in the region on the right side where the two ground regions are formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground region. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended current from flowing back from the high voltage component to the low voltage component through the ground region. Further, since the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs, they are prevented from interfering with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-9, since a capacitor is provided between the first ground region and the second ground region, the capacitor is used between the first ground region and the second ground region. Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, it is possible to prevent current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which a wiring pattern is not formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the first The ground region and the second ground region are electrically separated from each other. Further, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed so as to overlap each other, and the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on the mounting surface. Since the insulating region that separates the ground region and the insulating region that separates the first ground region and the second ground region on the solder surface are also formed so as to overlap, one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, it is prevented from interfering with each other.

FIG. 30-10 is a diagram showing a configuration of a connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-11 is a diagram showing a connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern of the periphery, and FIG. 30-12 is a figure which shows the state which the game control board in this Example is housed in a board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 for connecting wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the game control board near the lower side of the mounting surface. In the wiring from the game control board, the signal that triggers the lottery, the signal that defines the advantage for the player such as the lottery probability, the signal for shifting to a state where the setting value can be changed, and the setting value for changing the setting value. Wiring that inputs or outputs signals related to the advantage of the game, such as signals and signals that display information that is advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring that inputs the detection signal of the error cancellation operation, backup power supply Wiring as a supply line is included.

As shown in FIGS. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and is not directly connected to FIG. As shown in -11, the connector is connected to a wiring pattern formed on a solder surface, that is, a surface opposite to the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed around the wiring pattern. ing. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be configured to print information on the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface is the wiring on the mounting surface through the through hole at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminal. Connected to the pattern. In particular, the through-holes a to h shown in FIGS. 30-10 and 30-11 are through-holes to which the terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 It is provided at the place where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to connect the wiring pattern from the solder surface to the mounting surface by using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and 30-12 (B), the game control board is attached to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, a sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open the substrate case without leaving a trace. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case, the structure is such that fraud against the game control board is prevented.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and 30-12 (B), the substrate case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 in a state where the game control substrate is housed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the region of the mounting surface of the game control board that is covered by the covering portion of the substrate case, and the wiring pattern is formed while avoiding the region. There is. The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring from the outside, a slight gap is generated around the connectors CN1 to CN7, but the connectors CN1 to CN7 The terminals provided on the above are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and the solder surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite surface, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of connectors CN1 to CN7 can be short-circuited from around the part where connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case. It is designed to prevent fraudulent activities such as disconnection.

Further, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered with the covering portion of the substrate case, and the area covered by the covering portion is the wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. None of the wiring patterns including the pattern is formed, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface in the area other than the covering portion. The wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is surely prevented from being short-circuited or broken from the periphery of the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+ 5V) is generated on the power supply board and is connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. Further, Vcc (+ 5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board and connected to the charging capacitor via the backflow prevention diode, and the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor are connected. The line branched between them is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the electric power is being supplied, Vcc (+ 5V) is supplied as a driving power source for the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+ 5V) is stopped, so that the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer. By receiving the supply of the backup power supply VBB, the game control microcomputer holds the data stored in the RAM included in the game control microcomputer. In this embodiment, the backup power supply is supplied from the power supply board outside the game control board, but it may be supplied from the circuit provided in the game control board.

30-14 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-15 is a diagram formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the said wiring pattern, and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface.

As shown in FIGS. 30-14, on the solder surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power and wiring patterns VBB for supplying backup power are used as wiring patterns constituting the power supply line. , Are formed. As shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 are composed of a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB is composed of only the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, as shown in FIGS. 30-14. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is supplied is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to bypass the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so that noise from the outside is generated. It is less susceptible to damage and prevents the data stored in the RAM from being damaged by noise.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-15, a beta land is formed on the mounting surface where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the noise is blocked by the beta land formed on the mounting surface, so that the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is not easily affected by the noise. Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power is on the mounting surface side as compared with the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power. In the corresponding region of the above, the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, particularly the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied from the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In this embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB that supplies backup power is the corresponding area on the mounting surface side rather than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 that supply normal power. In the configuration, the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for transmission. However, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the signal that triggers the lottery. The wiring pattern in which signals related to the interests of the player are transmitted, such as, is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring pattern in which signals not directly related to the player's history, such as signals for controlling output components, are transmitted. It is used for the transmission of the signal formed on the mounting surface side by being formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding region. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern in which signals related to the interests of the player from the wiring pattern are transmitted is suppressed as much as possible.

Further, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern in which the reset signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and the wiring pattern in which the operation clock is given to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. Where the wiring pattern in which the signal is transmitted intersects the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side, compared to the wiring pattern in which other signals are transmitted. By making the configuration formed at a position where the number of signals is reduced, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern in which a relatively important signal is transmitted from the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side is as much as possible. It can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with game-related game parts such as a liquid crystal display, an effect control board for controlling the effect, a reel unit composed of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the surface of the game control board on the mounting surface side, that is, the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed, is on the game component side. Installed to be placed. With such a configuration, the influence of noise generated from the game component on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the pachinko gaming machine. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in the amusement park, it is often installed so that the back surfaces of the pachinko gaming machines face each other with other gaming devices such as other pachinko gaming machines. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko gaming machine, the game control board has a mounting surface side, that is, a surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed. It is installed so that it is placed on the device side. With such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other gaming devices on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

(Action effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a ratio of wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (left-right direction) different from the one direction is larger than the ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (left-right direction), and the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface has the ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (left-right direction) in the first direction (up and down). It is characterized in that it is larger than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are aggregated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are aggregated on the solder surface in the first direction. When the wiring pattern extending in the (vertical direction) and the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) intersect, the design such as bypassing the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of this embodiment is a square composed of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed without waste along the shape of the game control board.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that electronic components including a terminal row composed of a plurality of terminals are arranged so that the terminal rows are arranged in a second direction (left-right direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (left-right direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment has a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It has a rectangular shape consisting of, and is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (left-right direction) in which the distance can be long on the solder surface without being hindered by the electronic components.

The game control board of the present embodiment includes a wiring pattern in which the wiring pattern branches from one wiring pattern to two wiring patterns, and one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface. The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to bypass one wiring pattern of the branch destination or to intersect one wiring pattern of the branch destination and the other wiring pattern on the same surface, and the wiring pattern can be preferably used. Can be formed.

(Action effect 2)
The game control board of this embodiment connects a first terminal (terminal of a game control microcomputer) and a second terminal (terminals of an input circuit and an output circuit) separated in a specific direction (left-right direction) to a specific signal (terminals of an input circuit and an output circuit). A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting input data and output data is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction). A specific length (λ / 2) in which the linear wiring pattern formed by dividing and extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than. According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed by being divided into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction), and a straight line extending in a specific direction (left-right direction). The wiring pattern of each is formed shorter than the specific length (λ / 2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed. ) Can be prevented from becoming an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), and unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). .. According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) with a simple structure.

The game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). However, a wiring pattern may be formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) may be alternately formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) and another wiring pattern. It is characterized by branching to. According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be suitably branched by utilizing between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction and another wiring pattern.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the linear wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ / 2). According to such a configuration, the length of the linear wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (left-right direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), and therefore is equal to or less than the maximum frequency. Even if the signal is transmitted, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment has a specific length (λ / 2) in which the linear wiring pattern extending in a specific direction is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by having a length that does not become 1/2 (λ / 4). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern of a straight line extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) becomes 1/2 of the specific length (λ / 2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the substrate. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

(Action effect 3)
The game control board of this embodiment has a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+ 5V)) is connected, and a second voltage (VDL (+ 24V)). The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal is transmitted is connected, the first electronic component (low voltage component) is connected to the first ground region, and the second electronic component (second electronic component) The high voltage component) is characterized in that it is connected to a first ground region and a second ground region separated by an insulating portion. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+ 5V)) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground region and the second voltage. The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the (VDL (+ 24V)) signal is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground region and the second ground region separated by the insulating portion (insulating region). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended current from flowing back through the ground.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+ 5V)) is transmitted is connected to the first ground region. The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the second voltage (VDL (+ 24V)) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground region and the second ground region separated by the insulating portion. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which the current difference flowing through the wiring pattern connected by the first electronic component and the second electronic component is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground region and the second electronic component is connected. It may be configured to be connected to the first ground region and the second ground region separated by the insulating portion, and with such a configuration, the wiring connected by the first electronic component and the second electronic component. Even when the current difference flowing through the pattern is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground region and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground region, so that an unintended current flows back through the ground. Can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground region and the second ground region. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference is temporarily generated between the first ground region and the second ground region by the capacitor, it is possible to prevent the current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region. ..

In the game control board of this embodiment, a first ground region is formed on one side (left side), a second ground region is formed on the other side (right side) facing one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component) is formed. ) Is mounted in the first ground region, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground region. According to such a configuration, since the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other even if a potential difference temporarily occurs.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) in which a wiring pattern is not formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. It is characterized by. According to such a configuration, the insulating property between the first ground region and the second ground region can be enhanced.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even if a non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on at least one of the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground region and the first ground region are formed. The insulation between the second ground regions can be enhanced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed in corresponding regions, respectively, and the mounting surface is formed. The non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) of the solder surface and the non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) of the solder surface are also formed in the corresponding regions. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference is temporarily generated from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface, it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

(Action effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to a wiring pattern formed on a solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface on the opposite side instead of the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the portion where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is the wiring related to the advantage of the game (the signal for shifting the set value to a state where the set value can be changed, and the set value is changed. It is characterized by including a signal for inputting or outputting a signal for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display (wiring for inputting or outputting). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent cheating related to the advantage of the game.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) regarding the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portion of the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Since it is not formed, by displaying the information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this portion, the portion where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface can be effectively used.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the board case includes a covering portion that covers the area around the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is as follows. It is characterized in that it is formed on a solder surface in a region covered with a covering portion. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is not formed on the mounting surface even in the peripheral portion of the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7), so that the connector is formed from the board case. It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the exposed portion of the (connectors CN1 to CN7).

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface by using a through hole for connecting to an electronic component.

(Action effect 5)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having a storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface, so that the game control is performed. The microcomputer for game control can hold the stored contents of the storage means (RAM) by the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and uses the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) as the game control microcomputer. The wiring pattern (VBB) supplied to the computer is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which the electronic parts are not mounted, so that the electronic parts are bypassed. Since it is not necessary to form the data and the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is difficult to receive noise from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the data stored in the storage means (RAM) from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the game component (liquid crystal display, effect control board that controls the effect, etc.) side related to the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise generated from the game component on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the other game device (other game machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from other game devices on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is solid in the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area where the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is provided on the solder surface. It is characterized by the formation of a ground. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the beta land formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is higher than the wiring pattern (Vcc1 to 3) for supplying other power supplies. It is characterized in that there are few points that intersect with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side can be prevented as much as possible.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention. Needless to say.

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board that controls a game is described, but another board mounted on the game machine, for example, a board that controls an effect. The configuration according to the present invention may be applied to a gaming medium, a substrate that controls the addition of game value, a substrate that relays between the substrates, and the like.

The structure of the game control board in the second embodiment will be described. Similar to the first embodiment, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, electronic components are not mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment, and here, a configuration different from that of the game control board of the first embodiment will be mainly described. ..

FIG. 30-18 is a diagram showing a mounting surface of the game control board in the first embodiment, and FIG. 30-19 is a diagram showing a solder surface of the game control board in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board is a rectangular printed circuit board composed of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating property. Consists of. Further, a plurality of through holes are formed on the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. Further, an insulating region and a ground region are formed in the regions where the wiring patterns of the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board are not formed.

Similar to the game control board of the first embodiment, the game control board of the second embodiment also has an input circuit and an output circuit mounted therein. The input circuit and the output circuit are formed in a rectangular shape and have short sides. A concave notch is provided on one side, and a model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the component can be specified by the direction of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in the drawing and the model number is printed in the direction from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the right side in the drawing and the model number is printed. It is arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to specify whether these electronic components are an input circuit or an output circuit depending on the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. There is.

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing a configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-21 is a diagram from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the branched wiring pattern.

The game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns formed on the solder surface extending in the lateral direction, and as shown in FIGS. 30-20, the game control board of the game control board. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from the through hole to which the terminal of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side is connected. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern formed so as to branch to the mounting surface side through a through hole and extend in the vertical direction. ..

When connecting the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit separated in the lateral direction via the data bus, first, the data bus on the solder surface where the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the lateral direction. Branch to the mounting surface side wiring pattern that extends vertically toward the input circuit or output circuit through the through hole at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, and is connected to the input circuit or output circuit. It becomes. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the input circuit and the output circuit separated in the lateral direction. Further, since the wiring pattern constituting the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which the electronic components are not mounted, it is not easily affected by the noise from the electronic components on the data bus, and further, the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit Is connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through a through hole, so that the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and is less susceptible to the influence of noise from electronic components during this period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-22, the data bus is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit and output circuit connected to the data bus. Therefore, the noise on the data bus is less likely to affect the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-20, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the game control board in the vicinity of the upper side in the drawing, and a data bus is provided. The wiring pattern to be configured is formed in a region closer to the lower side in the drawing of the game control board, that is, a region closer to the other side facing the one side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. Therefore, the area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits is widely secured between the connectors CN10 to CN17 where signals are input and output and the electronic components outside the game control board and the data bus. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board has an input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for controlling the game (does not trigger a lottery). Input signals from the first input circuit that detects the input of sensors and switches (detection signals of sensors and switches, etc.) and the second input components that are more important than the first input components (detection signals of sensors and switches that trigger lottery, advantageous Based on the output data from the second input circuit that detects the input of the second input circuit that detects the input of the setting value that defines the degree, the game control microcomputer, etc., the operation of the moving parts such as the solenoid and motor according to the progress of the game. The first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component, and the second output that displays various indicators, LEDs, etc. according to the progress of the game based on the output data from the game control microcomputer. The second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the parts, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, is mounted on the game control board, and the payout rate when the game is played for a certain period of time, etc. A third output circuit that outputs an output signal to a performance indicator that displays performance is mounted.

Of these input circuits and output circuits, the first output circuit, the first output circuit, the second output circuit, and the third output circuit are connected to the data bus, and the input data and the output data are transmitted via the data bus. Is done.

As shown in FIG. 30-20, the wiring patterns constituting the data bus connected to the terminals of the game control microcomputer on the solder surface branch to the mounting surface side through through holes at a plurality of points, and are vertically formed on the mounting surface. It is connected to a wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position N in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the positions O and P in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the first output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface, and some wiring patterns are external as they are. It is connected to the output terminal, and the remaining wiring pattern is once connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole at the position R in the figure, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole at the position S in the figure. Is connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among the input circuits and output circuits connected by the shared data bus, the input circuit has a longer wiring pattern length than the output circuit to the game control microcomputer. It is connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used for controlling the game is less likely to be affected by noise or the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, an output signal is output to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game among the plurality of output circuits connected by the shared data bus. The first output circuit that outputs the game has a shorter wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the data bus so that it becomes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like and affecting the operation of the movable portion according to the progress of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is other than the performance indicator. Data so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display (second output component) that displays according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the bus. For this reason, it is difficult for the content of the performance display to be illegally modified due to the arrangement of illegal parts or the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-21, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder surface side, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure corresponds to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. It is connected to the external output terminal for outputting to. In this way, it is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by utilizing the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole. Since the wiring pattern and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched into the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting to the external device, the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the external output terminal Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each of the wiring patterns connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern is simply formed.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder surface side outputs an output signal to the second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. In addition to being connected to the terminals of the two output circuits, the wiring pattern is branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is also connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the external device according to the progress of the game. Well, even with such a configuration, in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by utilizing the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, it is connected to a plurality of output circuits. Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each of the wiring patterns, the wiring pattern is simply formed.

The second input circuit of the input circuits is not connected to the data bus, and the input data is directly transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is once connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole at the position T in the figure, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side. At the position of, it is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole, and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

In this way, the first input circuit that detects the input of the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for controlling the game, is connected to the game control microcomputer via the data bus. On the other hand, the second input circuit that detects the input of the input signal from the second input component, which is more important than the first input component, is not connected to the data bus and is directly connected without going through the data bus. It is connected to a game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is a data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through, the input data based on the important input signal is not affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit, and it is sent to the game control microcomputer. It will be transmitted.

(Action effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control computer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is the game control microcomputer. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from It is possible to prevent the data from being affected by noise or the like.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. However, the output circuit is an input circuit. It may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the game control microcomputer. With such a configuration, based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data based on an input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for controlling the game control computer to the game control computer. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the input circuit, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control computer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The output circuit is a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The first output circuit includes a second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game is the second output that displays according to the progress of the game. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the parts, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the movement of the movable part from being affected according to the progress.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit. With such a configuration, the game progresses. The second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays is from the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shortened, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise and the like, which affects the display according to the progress of the game. it can.

Further, like the game control board of the first embodiment, the first ground region on which the low voltage component is mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and the high voltage component is mounted on the right side. When the two ground regions are formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the two ground regions and outputs an output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game, is often mounted in the first ground region because it belongs to the low voltage component. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting it in the region, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground region together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, and it is possible to prevent the second output circuit from being overloaded. it can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. An electronic component is mounted only on the mounting surface, a data bus is formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus through the through hole is output on the mounting surface according to the progress of the game. It is characterized in that it branches into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for performing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal that outputs an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for performing the output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by utilizing the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole. Since the wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched into the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting to the external device, in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns. Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the solder surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be simply formed.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The first input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the first input component used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and the first input circuit used for controlling the game control microcomputer. 2 The second input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the input component to the game control microcomputer, and the first output component and the second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The first output circuit, the second output circuit, and the first input circuit, the first output circuit, and the second output circuit are connected to the game control microcomputer via the data bus, including the first output circuit and the second output circuit that output the output signal. The second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to a game control microcomputer without going through a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is for game control without going through the data bus in which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit. ..

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface on the opposite side to the solder surface on which the data bus is formed through the through hole. It is supposed to be. According to such a configuration, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus faces one side of the game control board. It is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side). According to such a configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the board area can be effectively utilized. ..

The game control board of this embodiment is equipped with a performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to other indicators. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display is more up to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the other display. Since the wiring pattern is short, it is possible to make it difficult to modify the display contents due to the placement of unauthorized parts.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the orientations of the components are different. With such a configuration, the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit can be easily grasped.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of Example 1 has the same effect as that described in Example 1. Further, the modified example exemplified for Example 1 can also be applied to Example 2.

The structure of the game control board in the third embodiment will be described. Similar to Examples 1 and 2, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, electronic components are not mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. The game control board in the third embodiment is characterized by the structure of the electronic component and the through hole to be mounted, and here, the structure of the electronic component and the through hole will be described.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in the third embodiment, FIG. 30-23 is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic component, and FIG. 30B is a perspective view of the specific electronic component. , It is a perspective view from below of a specific electronic component.

The specific electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and as shown in FIGS. 30-23 (A) and 30-23 (B), the specific electronic component is fixed to the substrate at the bottom of the specific electronic component. For the purpose, fixing terminals 1 and 2 that are not used for propagating signals and power of specific electronic components, and connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the board and used for propagating signals and power of specific electronic components. Is provided. Further, the model number of the specific electronic component is engraved or printed above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connecting terminal is illustrated as a specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component, or may be applied. An electronic component that does not have a fixing terminal but only a connecting terminal may be applied as a specific electronic component.

The through-holes provided on the game control board are usually composed of through-holes and specific through-holes. As shown in FIG. 30-24 (A), the through hole is usually subjected to copper plating, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through hole, so that the through hole becomes a mounting surface and a solder surface. It is a through hole that conducts with. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-24 (B), the specific through hole is a through hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through hole is not copper-plated and the through hole is not conductive between the mounting surface and the solder surface. is there.

Normally, when soldering to the through hole from the solder surface side, as shown in FIG. 30-24 (A), the through hole is copper-plated, so that the solder in the through hole reaches the mounting surface. Although it flows up, when soldering to a specific through hole from the solder surface side, as shown in FIG. 30-24 (B), since the through hole is not copper-plated, the inside of the through hole is filled. The solder does not flow up and the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 into the specific through hole, inserting the connection terminal into the normal through hole, and soldering from the solder surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted into the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side. Therefore, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. It is possible to prevent problems such as the model number printed or engraved above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by solder because the component is raised too much toward the mounting surface on which the component is mounted.

In particular, since the model number is hidden by solder, there is a risk that it cannot be found even if the part is replaced illegally, and if the model number is hidden in the type test, the part configuration cannot be specified and the test is not passed, and approval is given. There is a risk that you will not be able to receive the product, or you may not be allowed to install it in the game store because you cannot confirm the model number when installing it in the game store. By fixing with, such a problem can be prevented.

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for propagating signals and electric power of specific electronic components, a problem occurs even if the electrical connection is weakened when soldering through a specific through hole. Never. On the other hand, since the connection terminal is usually inserted into the through hole and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, the electrical connection can be ensured when the solder reaches the mounting surface.

(Action effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and a wiring pattern is formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A terminal is inserted through a through hole that penetrates the surface and the solder surface, and the through hole and the terminal are fixed by soldering, and a specific through hole is formed in which a specific electronic component is fixed among a plurality of electronic components. The specific through hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface does not conduct, and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered from the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through hole is soldered because the mounting surface and the solder surface do not conduct with each other and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered from the solder surface. At that time, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and causing a defect.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered. According to such a configuration, since it is the terminals for fixing the specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) that are soldered to the specific through holes, the solder reaches the mounting surface. By not doing so, there is no problem even if the electrical connection is weakened.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered to the specific through holes. A terminal (connection terminal) that propagates the signal or power of the component may be inserted and soldered. According to such a configuration, the solder rises too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short-circuiting of terminals that propagate signals and power of specific electronic components with other terminals.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or engraved) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and hiding the model number of the specific electronic component.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the third embodiment, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configurations as those of Examples 1 and 2 have the same effects as those described in Examples 1 and 2. Further, the modifications illustrated with reference to Examples 1 and 2 can also be applied to Example 3.

(Invention of Feature 053SG)
As described above, the feature unit 053SG includes the inventions shown below. That is, conventionally, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-93428, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine is generally provided with a substrate on which an electronic device is mounted. A board of this type has been proposed in which data is input / output between a control means such as a CPU and another electronic device using a single data bus. In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of the wiring pattern. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine in which the wiring pattern of the substrate is preferably formed, the gaming machine of (1) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from control means (microcomputer for game control) and electronic parts (input parts) used for controlling the control means (microcomputer for game control) is input to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the output circuit.
According to this feature, an input circuit that transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means outputs to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the output circuit that outputs the signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of (2) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1).
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface) and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine of (3) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2).
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern branched to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface (solder surface) on which the data bus is formed through a through hole. It is a feature.
According to this feature, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of (4) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3).
On the board (game control board), connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted in the vicinity of one side (upper side), and the data bus is the board (game). The control board) is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side) facing the one side.
According to this feature, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector and the data bus, so that the board area can be effectively used.

The gaming machine of (5) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4).
A performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine is mounted on the board (game control board).
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance display is more like the control means (game control) than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to another display. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the (microcomputer) is shortened.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to other indicators, which is an illegal component. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally modify the display contents due to the arrangement of

The gaming machine of (6) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5).
The input circuit and the output circuit are characterized in that they are mounted on the substrate so that the orientations of the components are different.
According to this feature, the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit can be easily grasped.

The gaming machine (7) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6).
The data bus is characterized in that it is connected to a noise reduction circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, the influence of noise on the control means can be prevented.

The gaming machine of (8) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from control means (microcomputer for game control) and electronic parts (input parts) used for controlling the control means (microcomputer for game control) is input to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The output circuit outputs to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A second electronic component (second electronic component) that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal and the control means (microcomputer for game control). Includes a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to (two output components).
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the second output circuit (second output circuit). It is characterized by being done.
According to this feature, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game becomes the second electronic component that displays according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is affected by noise etc. and can move according to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the operation of the part from being affected.

The gaming machine of (9) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from control means (microcomputer for game control) and electronic parts (input parts) used for controlling the control means (microcomputer for game control) is input to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
In the board (game control board), electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and the data bus is connected through a through hole. The first wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern of the first surface (mounting surface) on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game. It is characterized by branching into a second wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal) for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the first surface side is used to output according to the progress of the game by utilizing the wiring pattern of the first surface connected from the data bus formed on the second surface through the through hole. Since the wiring pattern and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched into the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, it is formed on the second surface to branch into each of the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern. Since it is not necessary to branch from the generated data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be simply formed.

The gaming machine (10) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from control means (microcomputer for game control) and electronic parts (input parts) used for controlling the control means (microcomputer for game control) is input to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
A first input for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer). Input data based on input signals from the circuit (first input circuit) and the second electronic component (second input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control). A third electronic component (first output component, second output) based on the second input circuit (second input circuit) transmitted to the (microcomputer) and the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). Includes an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component).
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus.
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the control means (microcomputer for game control) without going through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without going through the data bus to which the input data from another input circuit and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit.

The gaming machine of (11) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from control means (microcomputer for game control) and electronic parts (input parts) used for controlling the control means (microcomputer for game control) is input to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The output circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the input circuit.
According to this feature, an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the input circuit transmitted to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of (12) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from control means (microcomputer for game control) and electronic parts (input parts) used for controlling the control means (microcomputer for game control) is input to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The output circuit outputs to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A second electronic component (second electronic component) that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal and the control means (microcomputer for game control). Includes a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to (two output components).
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the first output circuit (first output circuit). It is characterized by being done.
According to this feature, the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second electronic component that displays according to the progress of the game becomes the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the first output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is affected by noise etc. and is displayed according to the progress of the game. Can be prevented from affecting the.

In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is inside the gaming machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least one that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming medium (for example, a game). A storage unit capable of storing the ball P) (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201), a payout unit capable of paying out the game medium (for example, a payout device 200), and a game having an open upper surface. With a guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202 or a second guide passage forming portion 204) forming a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) for guiding the medium to the payout portion. , A cover portion (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion, and a display means (for example, a pachinko game). The machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 and the like), and the cover portion is formed with the guide passages of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover portion. A predetermined limiting portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) for limiting the fall to the portion is provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24), and the guide passage forming portion is provided with the limiting portion. A plurality of specific limiting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion to the payout portion are provided (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27). The predetermined limiting portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) is provided so as to be able to drop from the cover portion without retaining the game medium that has fallen on the cover portion. The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, an image display device). The display area 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51). The background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 has the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. , The background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed, etc.), In the second display area, the amount of the given game value can be displayed on the front side of the background image. Yes (for example For example, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls given on the front side of the background image in the second display area 20SH52), at least in the first display area. On the front side of the background image, as a notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be given has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be given has reached the first predetermined amount. And a second notification display for notifying that the amount of the game value to be imparted has reached the second predetermined amount can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 has a background image in at least the first display area 20SH51. On the front side of the jackpot, the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state is "1000" as the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH that notifies that the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". It is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" when reaching "2000 over", and when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", the acquisition number notification of "2000 over" is displayed. The display can be displayed, etc.), and the grant amount display is updated every time the game value is granted in the advantageous state (for example, in the acquired number display 20SHK, the game ball is used as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. The notification display ends when a specific period elapses after the display is started (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is predetermined after the display is started). The characters used for the notification display are larger in size than the characters used for the grant amount display (for example, used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH). The characters are larger in size than the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, etc.), and the characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display are formed by a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. (For example, the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.). The background image of the specific character used for the quantity display is invisible from the specific area (for example, the background image of the specific character used for the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible from the specific area, etc.). , The specific character used for the notification display is the background image from the specific area. A gaming machine that is visually recognizable (for example, the specific character used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is such that the background image can be visually recognized from a specific area) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion. Further, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined limiting portion and the state in which the screw member can always stay can be maintained, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. can do. In addition, a display including specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image.

That is, by preventing the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion, it is possible to make the gaming machine less likely to break down, and the specific characters used for the grant amount display are for gaming in an advantageous state. It is updated every time the value is given, and the background image is made invisible from the specific area surrounded by the lines forming the characters, and the characters used for the notification display are larger than the characters used for the given amount display. Since the characters are large in size and the background image can be seen from a specific area, the amount of grant can be displayed in small characters but always easy to check, while the notification display can indicate that the specified amount has been reached in large characters. It can be displayed without hiding the background image. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not easily break down when installed in a game hall, makes it easy for the player to grasp the amount of value to be given for the game, and easily recognizes that the predetermined amount has been reached.

Further, an example of a form of a gaming machine in which a screw member can be prevented from falling or being mixed in a guide passage forming portion or a payout portion, and a display including a specific character can be suitably displayed in relation to a background image. As a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. The display area of the display means is a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area. (For example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51, a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, and the like. The display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 has a first display). In the area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, the background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed, etc.), and in the second display area, the gaming value given to the front side of the background image It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display the acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the grant number of prize balls on the front side of the background image in the second display area 20SH52. At least in the first display area, the amount of the value given for the game is the first place as a notification display for notifying that the amount of the value given for the game has reached a predetermined amount on the front side of the background image. It is possible to display a first notification display for notifying that a fixed amount has been reached and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of added gaming value has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5). Is a jackpot gaming state as the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH that notifies that the number of prize balls given in the jackpot gaming state has reached the number of "Kiriban" on the front side of the background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. When the number of prize balls given in is reached "1000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over", and the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "2000". (For example, it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over"), and the grant amount display is for gaming in the advantageous state. It is updated every time a value is given (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), and the notification display is displayed after the display is started. The display ends when a specific period elapses (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period elapses after the display starts), and the characters used for the notification display are , Characters having a size larger than the characters used for the given amount display (for example, the characters used for the acquired number notification display 20SHKK are larger than the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, etc.) The characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH). The character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed), and the specific character used for the given amount display cannot see the background image from the specific area. (For example, the background image of the specific character used for the acquired number display 20SHK cannot be visually recognized from the specific area, etc.), and the specific character used for the notification display can be visually recognized from the specific area. (For example, the specific character used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is such that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area). Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electroluminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 33). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 33), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. As shown in the figure, the frame lamp 9b includes a lower left lamp 9bL1 in a lower left portion, an upper left lamp 9bL2 in an upper left portion, a lower right lamp 9bR1 in a lower right portion, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 in an upper right portion. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. Further, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speakers 8L and 8R portions corresponding to the speakers 8L and 8R, respectively. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided at a position below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left side display device lower lamp 9fL and a right side display device lower lamp 9fR as shown in the figure. There is. Further, 9 g of lamps in the vicinity of the general winning opening are provided in the vicinity of the general winning opening 10 provided at three locations on the lower left side of the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 31), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. When the movable body lamp 9d, the above-mentioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, speaker lamp 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. There is. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the display device lower lamp 9f, and the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are configured to include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 33).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 33).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until one of the earlier timings. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the big hit game state, a so-called right-handed hit that launches the game ball into the game area on the right side may be performed so that the game ball is won in the big prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum opening period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. 33. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 35. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 35 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 35 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 34 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 37 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 37 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 37 (B) shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is small for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is small for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as the effect switch (to execute the predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 38 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 38 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form of direct execution using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-1 to 40-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of balls acquired after a predetermined period in which the attacker is in the open state in the first round game, and the attacker wins a prize within the predetermined period. If not, a predetermined display indicating that the number of balls won has not increased is displayed, and if the attacker wins a prize within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 042AK having such features will be described. The same parts as those described in the above basic explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 40-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which includes a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d. , Speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, and other game effect lamps 9 are all turned on. It is a figure. In the feature portion 042AK of the present embodiment, which will be described in detail later, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d , Speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), game effect lamp 9 such as general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, lights in sequence from lower left to lower right. It is possible to suggest to the player that he should hit right.

FIG. 40-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 36 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 40-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 042AKS002, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is made (step 042AKS003). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It should be stored in. After that, the jackpot flag is cleared to turn it off (step 042AKS004). In addition, a setting for ending the probability change state and the time saving state is made (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, a process of clearing the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn off the state, a process of clearing the special figure fluctuation counter for counting the number of executions of the special figure game in the probability change state and the time saving state, and the like It should be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step 042AKS006), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the big hit flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the process of step 042AKS008, the setting for transmitting the hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is made in the same manner as the process of step 042AKS003 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small hit flag is cleared to turn it off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 042AKS011).

If the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). .. After executing any of the processes of step 042AKS011 and step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to end the probability change state or the time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure fluctuation count counter (special figure fluctuation count value) is updated by, for example, 1 subtraction or 1 addition, and the updated special figure fluctuation count value is predetermined. It is determined whether or not it matches the special game state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the probability change state or the time reduction state may be ended and the normal state may be controlled by clearing the probability change flag or the time reduction flag to turn it off. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag may be maintained, and the process of step 042AKS013 may be completed. After executing the end determination of the probability change state or the time saving state, the special symbol stop process ends. It should be noted that the end determination based on the special figure fluctuation count value may be performed only when the time is shortened, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit". .. Alternatively, for example, the probability change state is terminated by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability change state end from a random counter provided in the RAM 102 and referring to the probability change state end determination table previously stored in the ROM 101 or the like. It may be decided whether or not to do so.

FIG. 40-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 36 as the big hit opening pre-process. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 40-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is on (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start flag is set to the on state in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. 36, corresponding to the jackpot flag being on. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start effect is waiting (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop process in step S113 shown in FIG. 33, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set. Set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, it is determined that the jackpot start effect is waiting in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, "0"). , Corresponding to the match, it may be determined that the production is not waiting at the start of the big hit.

If the jackpot start effect is waiting in step 042AKS022, step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value (step 042AKS023), the jackpot opening pre-processing ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot start production is not waiting in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), and the jackpot opening count counter is cleared. (Step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 is read out (step 042AKS026), and the release control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type. For example, when there is a jackpot type of "probability", a jackpot of "probability change" or "non-probability change" It may be set to an open control pattern different from the type. Further, even if the jackpot type is "probability variation" or "non-probability variation", different opening control patterns are set depending on the jackpot type, for example, the jackpot type of "probability variation 1" and "probability variation 2" are set to different opening control patterns. It may be set in a pattern.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the player is waiting for opening the large winning opening in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next release wait end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the next release wait is in progress, but if they match If so, it may be determined that the next release is not waiting. If the next opening standby is in step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), the process proceeds to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. The game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. 40-2, or the post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 of FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the next opening is not waiting (step 042AKS027; No), the large winning opening is opened according to the set opening control pattern and the count value in the large winning opening opening counter. (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a large prize formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed by setting a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the large winning opening opening time in the game control process timer. The large prize opening time, which is the upper limit of the time for opening the mouth, is set. Further, for example, the solenoid drive signal for the predetermined large winning opening door is started to be output via the predetermined solenoid circuit, so that the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening is turned on. The state is set.

At this time, for example, when the count value in the large winning opening opening counter is any of "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the large winning opening opening time is the game control process timer. Is set to.

Then, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the value of the special figure process flag is updated by adding 1 to the count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the process during the opening of the big hit. After updating to 5 ”(step 042AKS031), the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening is completed.

FIG. 40-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 36 as the process during the opening of the jackpot. In the process during the jackpot opening shown in FIG. 40-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the game ball has been won in the jackpot by, for example, determining whether or not the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). If there is no winning of the game ball in the large winning opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if there is a winning of the game ball to the big winning opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 updates by adding 1 to the winning number count value, and the game ball is the big winning opening. A setting is made to transmit a prize designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value is not a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), after the game control process timer value is subtracted by 1 and updated (step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether or not 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the large winning opening was opened, depending on whether or not the timer value is matched (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the process of opening the large winning opening is terminated as it is.

When it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or 29.5 seconds have passed since the large winning opening was opened in step 042AKS045. When it is determined (step 042AKS043; Yes), for example, the output of the solenoid drive signal to the predetermined solenoid for the winning opening door is stopped via the predetermined solenoid circuit to close the winning opening. The solenoid for the large winning opening door is set to be turned off (step 042AKS046), and the winning number count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, the setting for transmitting the designated command after opening the large winning opening is made to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special figure process flag is set after opening the large winning opening. After updating to "6", which is a value corresponding to the processing (step 042AKS049), the processing during the jackpot opening is terminated.

In this way, the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 40-2, the jackpot opening pre-processing shown in FIG. 40-3, the jackpot opening processing shown in FIG. 40-4, etc. (including the jackpot opening post-processing and the jackpot end processing). Is executed to set transmission of various effect control commands such as a winning start designation command, a large winning opening open designation command, a winning designation command, and a large winning opening post-opening designation command. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 35 is executed, and the effect control command set to be transmitted is transmitted to the control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12, so that the effect control board 12 side , The timing of each timing such as the start of the big hit, the opening and closing of the big winning opening (start of the round) and the closing (the end of the round), the winning of the big winning opening and the end of the big hit, etc.

FIG. 40-5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed in the jackpot middle effect processing of step S176 of FIG. 39 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIGS. 40-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051). When it is determined in the big hit opening post-processing of step S116 of FIG. 36 that the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit execution number, the hit end designation command is the main board. It is a command transmitted from the side of 11, and is a command for ending the effect during the big hit and executing the ending effect.

When it is determined that the hit end designation command has not been received (step 042AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nR (the nR predetermined period has elapsed). Determine (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and the initial value is set to "1", which is sequentially added by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066 described later, and cleared to "1" in step 042AKS066. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, which is set as a timer value at the start of the round game, and when the timer value becomes "0", it may be determined that the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the nR round. More specifically, from the side of the main board 11 in response to the fact that the big prize opening is completely open (it is detected that the big winning door has moved to the position where it is completely open). The designated command during the opening of the large winning opening is transmitted, and the timer value for a predetermined period may be counted from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the round game of the first round, the number of acquired balls is displayed and the number of rounds is indicated. The display is done. On the side of the production control board 12, the number of acquisitions is obtained each time a prize designation command indicating that the game ball has won a prize is received in the big prize opening during the period from the big hit to the end (the period from the fanfare to the ending). Is continuously added by 15. When the effect control board 12 receives the prize designation command, it is necessary to first analyze the command, add the number of acquisitions, and display the added number of acquisitions. It takes a predetermined period to display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processes will not be in time for the winning from the start of the round game of the first round until the predetermined period elapses, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of acquisitions. , The process of displaying "0015" may not catch up even though the prize is won (it becomes "0015" after "0000" is displayed, which gives the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, when a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds is provided and the game ball existing at the upper part of the large winning opening at the opening timing wins a prize from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed. In addition, a period in which "0015" is directly displayed without displaying "0000" as the number of acquisitions is secured. On the other hand, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when continuously firing, and the period from firing to winning the grand prize opening is set. Even if it is taken into consideration, the time interval required for the continuously fired game balls to win a prize in the large winning opening is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of winnings in the large winning opening is one from the opening of the large winning opening to the display of the number of winnings. Therefore, by increasing the number of winnings in the state before the number of acquisitions and the number of rounds are displayed, it is possible to prevent the number of acquisitions from being displayed at the timing when the number of rounds is displayed and giving the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Although the predetermined period in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

When it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the nR (step 042AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n = 1, that is, whether or not it is the first round. Determine (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, which is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is set to "1", and 1 is sequentially added in the process of step 042AKS066, and "1" is added in step 042AKS066. Cleared to. In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether or not n = 1 by confirming the value of n.

When it is determined that n = 1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs a right-handed effect suggesting that the player should hit right, and suggests that the player is in a big hit game state. The operation of the fanfare effect is controlled (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, when it is determined that n ≠ 1 (step 042AKS053; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R, displays the number of acquisitions, and displays the number of acquisitions, and the n-1R. (Step 042AKS055). In the process of step 042AKS055, for example, when n = 2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of acquisitions are displayed, and the operation control of the big hit middle effect corresponding to the first round is performed. In the process of step 042AKS055, as a jackpot effect, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect, and predetermined music and sound are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if the production of outputting is performed. The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot production may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (step 042AKS056). In the process of step 042AKS056, the winning is determined from the start of the nR to the predetermined period. When the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when the winning opening is won by the predetermined period from the start of the nR (step 042AKS056; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of winning balls. Is added by "15" (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of acquired balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the process of step 042AKS057 or the process of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of balls won is continuously counted during the so-called consecutive villa, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "big hit", that is, at the end timing of the consecutive villa. .. After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the effect control CPU 120 causes the attacker lamp 9c to emit light and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). The light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is more than the number of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light in the big hit production, for example (winning prize). It emits light in an aspect of notifying that it has been done. Therefore, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and the game interest can be improved. As for the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of times of light emission per unit time may be larger at the time of winning and at the time of producing during the big hit. When a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period, and a winning sound is output. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and the game interest can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS058, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n = 1, that is, whether or not it is the first round (1st R), as in step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059). ). If n = 1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are terminated as they are. On the other hand, if n ≠ 1, that is, if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of acquired balls is displayed), and the number of acquired balls is displayed. After the update display (step 042AKS060), various display processes are terminated. In addition, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, when the acquired number update display is performed in the process of step 042AKS060, the count value of the acquired number of balls added in step 042AKS057 is not displayed as it is, but is shown in FIG. 40-. As shown in 12 (a-23), the count-up display (notification display indicating that the number of acquisitions is increasing) is performed, and then the number of acquisitions is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of balls to be acquired increases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 40-5 that a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nR (step 042AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nR and the number of acquisitions. And, at the same time, the operation control of the effect during the big hit of the nR is performed (step 042AKS061). When n = 1, that is, in the case of the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a prize before the elapse of the predetermined period, the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed in step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening before the lapse of a predetermined period, the number of acquisitions is added by "15" in step 042AKS057. Therefore, in step 042AKS061, FIG. 40-11 (a-20). ) Is displayed to count up (notification display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), and then as shown in FIG. 40-11 (a-21), the number of acquisitions has not increased in this big hit. The number of acquisitions (display of "0015") is displayed (display of "0015") different from the predetermined display indicating (in the case of a consecutive villa, the display of the number of acquisitions at the time of the previous big hit plus "15" is counted. You can do it after the upload). On the other hand, if the game ball has not won the big prize opening before the lapse of the predetermined period, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in this big hit. Therefore, FIG. 40-11 (a). As shown in -22), as a predetermined display, the number of acquisitions is displayed (display of "0000") indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased (if it is in a consecutive villa, the number of acquisitions at the time of the previous big hit remains the same. You can display it). In addition to "0000" as the display of the number of acquisitions (predetermined display) indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased, a display other than a number such as "---" or "not increased" is performed. You may do so. Further, in step 042AKS061, as a jackpot effect, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect, and predetermined music and sound are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if the production of outputting is performed. The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot production may be set in advance. In this way, during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in the situation where the number of winnings is not displayed, only the attacker lamp 9c lights up when the game ball wins the large winning opening. However, in a situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the effect lamps 9 provided on the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately alternated. Is turned on, and more effect lamps 9 are emitted than during a predetermined period. Therefore, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and after the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. The production can be lively and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, since the effect lamp 9 is emitted at the same timing as the execution timing of the big hit middle effect, the effect can be excited at once at the timing when the big hit medium effect is executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS063). The attacker playing card 9c is made to emit light, the winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, the count-up is displayed (notification display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), and then the number of acquisitions is displayed. The number of acquisitions is updated. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the process of step 042AKS064, or when the prize designation command is not received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), has the effect control CPU 120 started the next round of the nR, the n + 1R? It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be determined whether or not a designated command during opening of the large winning opening indicating the start of the n + 1R is received from the side of the main board 11. When the n + 1R has not started, that is, when the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening has not been received and the nR remains (step 042AKS065; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is. .. On the other hand, when the n + 1R starts, that is, when a designated command indicating the start of the n + 1R is received (step 042AKS065; Yes), after adding n by "1" (step 042AKS066), various display processes. To finish. For example, when n = 1, that is, in the first round, n = 2 in step 042AKS066. Although n = 2 and the second round, until the predetermined period elapses, it is determined as No in steps 042AKS052 and 053, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round which is the n-1R. The round display is performed, and after the lapse of a predetermined period, the round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (after being determined as Yes in step 042AKS052, it is displayed in the process of step 042AKS061).

When it is determined in step 042AKS051 that the hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets to end the big hit middle effect corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending effect (step 042AKS051). 042AKS067), clear n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and end various display processes.

Subsequently, display timings such as round number display and acquisition number display and examples of effect operations will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 40-6 to 40-14. In the illustrated example, the case where the so-called first hit (first big hit) is shown, not in the consecutive villas.

FIG. 40-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the large winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. 40-7 to 40-14 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation display in the image display device 5, an open / closed state of a large winning opening, and a lighting state of various lamps. As shown in FIGS. 40-6 and 40-7 (a-1), when the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game state is reached. At this stage, as shown in FIG. 40-7 (b-1), the large winning opening is closed. Further, in order to notify the player that a big hit has occurred, as shown in FIG. 40-7 (c-1), the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the speaker lamp 9eL, Various effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, the lower lamp 9f of the display device, and the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2.

When it becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 40-6, a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect are performed to notify the player that the player should hit right until the predetermined period of the first round ends (Fig. 40-). Step 042AKS054) of step 5. The period from the jackpot shown in FIG. 40-6 to the start of the first R is a sufficiently longer period than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 40-7 (a-2), the effect image of the fanfare is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 40-7 (c-2). All effect lamps 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, the effect lamp 9 is turned on in the order of the lower left side, the upper left side, the central portion, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and the right-handed effect of displaying "right-handed" on the image display device is performed. The small right-handed display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 40-7 (a-2) may be continuously displayed during the big hit game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed effect, as shown in FIGS. 40-7 (a-3) to 40-10 (a-19), in the image display device 5, the “right-handed” image is superimposed on the fanfare image. The display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the effect lamp 9 will be described below. When the right-handed effect is started, as shown in FIG. 40-7 (c-3), the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g provided in the lower left of the game area is first lit, and then FIG. 40-7 (Fig. 40-7). As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left portion, lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 40-7 (c-5), of the display device lower lamps 9f provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left side display device lower lamp 9fL is lit, and then the left side display device lower lamp 9fL is turned on. As shown in FIG. 40-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left portion, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 40-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L portion. 9eL lights up. In this way, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 40-8 (b-7), since the large winning opening is closed, the launched game medium does not win the large winning opening at this stage. In the example shown in FIG. 40-8 (b-7), the launched game ball passes through the second path of the upper part of the grand prize opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided in the upper center portion of the game board 2 is turned on, and FIG. 40-8 (c-9). ), The main lamp 9 located above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on, so that the effect lamp 9 provided in the upper center portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

Next, the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R portion is turned on as shown in FIG. 40-8 (c-10), and then the frame lamp in the upper right portion is lit as shown in FIG. 40-8 (c-11). The upper right lamp 9bR2, which is 9, is lit, and as shown in FIG. 40-8 (c-12), the right display device of the display device lower lamp 9f provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the game board 2. The lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 40-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1 which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right part is lit, and the attacker lamp 9c provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 is lit. To do. In this way, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, the effect lamp 9 lights up in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the central part, and then from the upper right side to the lower right side, so that the effect lamp 9 hits the player right. Right-handed production will be performed to suggest. In this example, both the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are used to suggest right-handed striking. It may be. In addition, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 lights from the lower left side to the center and the lower right side, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 lights from the lower left side to the center and right. Both may be lit independently at the same time or with a time lag, such as lighting in the downward direction.

After the right-handed effect of the effect lamps 9 is completed, all the effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 40-9 (c-15). As shown in FIG. 40-9 (a-15), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed (the right-handed effect itself is being executed).

Next, when the opening timing of the large winning opening is reached as shown in FIG. 40-6, the first R is started, and the large winning opening is opened as shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-16). At this stage, right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed as shown in FIG. 40-10 (a-16), and is shown in FIG. 40-10 (c-16) until a predetermined period elapses. As such, all effect lamps 9 remain off (same until FIGS. 40-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all the effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any of the indexes such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set to be lower than usual. Further, as shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-16), even after the large winning opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, FIGS. 40-7 (c-3) to 40-9. As shown in (c-13), the effect lamps 9 may be turned on in sequence to suggest right-handed strikes. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be faster than before the opening of the big winning opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be faster). Further, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the large winning opening is opened to suggest a right-handed strike, after the last lit attacker lamp 9c is turned on, it is shown in FIG. 40-9 (c-15). You may leave it on as it is without turning it off. According to this, the player can be made aware that the big winning opening has been opened.

Then, when the large winning opening is completely opened as shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-17), the count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period corresponding to the first R is started, and FIG. 40-10 is started. When the game ball wins the large winning opening as shown in (b-18), the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and the winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side. It should be noted that the large winning opening is also open for the game ball (early hit game ball) launched by performing the right-handed effect before the first R is started (before the large winning opening is opened). If it exists in the upper part of the large winning opening at the timing, it becomes possible to win a prize within a predetermined period corresponding to the first R. On the side of the effect control board 12, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-18) by the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 40-5, and the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 40-10 (c-18). As shown in the above, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner of notifying that the prize has been won. As described above, the attacker lamp 9c emits light in a manner larger than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c, which emits light in, for example, the big hit medium effect. In the example shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning path provided with the count switch 23. An example is shown. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period from the opening of the big winning opening, and the game interest is lowered without giving the player anxiety. Can be prevented.

After the game ball has won the big prize opening as shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-18), or without winning from the state shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-17), time has passed without winning, and FIG. 40- When the predetermined period elapses as shown in 10 (a-19), (b-19) and (c-19), as shown in FIG. 40-6, the number of rounds corresponding to the first R is displayed and the jackpot medium effect is produced. Since it is the execution timing and the execution timing of the acquisition number display, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 40-5 is executed.

Specifically, when the game ball wins the big prize opening before the lapse of a predetermined period as shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-18), as shown in FIG. 40-11 (a-20), the first The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the count-up display is performed. Further, at the same timing as these displays, as a big hit middle effect (1st R middle effect), as shown in FIG. 40-11 (a-20), a decorative pattern constituting the big hit is displayed and "BOUNUS" is displayed. , And the character are displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot and the display of "during BOUNUS" displayed as the jackpot middle production (1st R middle production) are not shown (the same applies to FIGS. 40-20 described later). It is displayed in a manner suggesting that it should be right-handed as shown in 40-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or a right-handed effect is performed and a predetermined period elapses after the big winning opening is opened, the big hit medium effect is shown in FIG. 40-21. As shown in (A-2), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is displayed in a front-facing manner, and at the top of "B" in the "BOUNUS" display. A star-shaped image is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 40-21 (A-3), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is tilted toward the right back, and "in BOUNUS" is displayed. The star-shaped image shifts to the upper part of "O". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 40-21 (A-4), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, faces the front, and a star is placed above the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. The shape image shifts. After that, as shown in FIG. 40-21 (A-5), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is inclined toward the left back direction, and "U" in the "BOUNUS" display is displayed. The star-shaped image shifts to the top of. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-21 (A-6), the symbol "7", which is the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot again, faces the front, and the star is above the "S" in the "BOUNUUS" display. The image of the shape shifts and returns to FIG. 40-21 (A-2). In this way, in the big hit medium production, the decorative patterns that make up the big hit are operated in the right back direction, the front, and the left back direction, and a star-shaped image is displayed from the left character of the "BOUNUS middle" display to the right. It suggests to the player that he should hit right by shifting. The operation display of the decorative pattern that constitutes the jackpot and the transition display of the star-shaped image are called effect display. In addition to this, for example, a predetermined image is rotated clockwise or the character is gradually displayed. Includes indications such as pointing to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner suggesting right-handed striking. According to this, the effect display suggests that right-handed hitting should be performed, and right-handed hitting can be easily recognized.

In the jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 40-11 (c-20), the effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot effect. In this example, it is assumed that a light emitting pattern is set in which the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquired number display. In this way, as shown in FIGS. 40-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the effect lamp 9 is not emitted until the large winning opening is opened and the predetermined period elapses, and FIG. 40 As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect lamp 9 is made to emit light after the display of the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the early hitting by the player and promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined period elapses without the game ball winning the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 40-11 (a-22), the count-up display is not performed and the number of acquisitions is displayed as "0000". Is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as the big hit middle production (1st R middle production), the decorative symbols constituting the big hit are displayed, "BOUNUS" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 lights up according to the light emission pattern set in advance according to the effect during the big hit are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won.

Next, as time elapses, as shown in FIG. 40-12 (b-23), when the tenth game ball wins the big winning opening in the first R, the upper limit at which the big winning opening can be opened. It will be a period. Along with the winning, the process of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 40-5 is executed, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 40-12 (a-23), and FIG. 40-12 (a-24). As shown in the above, the number of acquired "0150" is displayed. Further, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 40-12 (b-23), and in addition to lighting the effect lamp 9 corresponding to the effect during the big hit, FIG. 40-12 (c-23). ), The attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner of notifying that the prize has been won. It should be noted that the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the elapse of a predetermined period. Since the continuous firing interval is 0.6 seconds, 10 prizes are sufficiently possible. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because sufficient time is secured for winning.

When the 10th game ball wins the big prize opening in the 1st R, the maximum period during which the big winning opening can be opened is reached. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 40-12 (b-24), the large winning opening is opened. It is controlled to be closed. After that, during the period until the second R shown in FIG. 40-6 is started, the large winning opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 40-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the second R elapses (from the time when n = 2 until the predetermined period elapses), as shown in FIG. 40-12 (a-25), the number of rounds corresponding to the first R is displayed. , The big hit production is continuously performed (the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed according to the winning), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the big hit production as shown in FIG. 40-12 (c-25). Lights up.

In the 1st R, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game ball is controlled. In some cases, a so-called over-winning may occur in which the player wins a prize in the large winning opening following the tenth game ball. Even in the over winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 40-12 (a-23), and the number of acquired "0165" may be displayed. In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings are displayed according to the tenth prize, the count-up display and the number of winnings corresponding to the over-winning are displayed, but FIG. 40-12 (b-25). As shown in the above, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from the time when the large winning opening is completely closed to the time before the opening state corresponding to the second R is reached. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize that the over-winning has occurred in the first round, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, since the update of the number of acquisitions display in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is possible to determine whether the winning is corresponding to the opening of the round. It will be easy. Further, the winning sound corresponding to the over winning sound may be a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, when the winning value exceeds the upper limit value "10", the over winning sound may be output. Further, the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a mode corresponding to over-winning, unlike the light emission in the normal winning mode.

Then, corresponding to the second round, the timing is such that the large winning opening is opened again as shown in FIG. 40-6, and the large winning opening is opened again as shown in FIG. 40-13 (b-26). Is controlled to be. At this time, Yes is determined in step 042AKS065 of FIG. 40-5, that is, a command indicating the start of the n + 1R is received, and the process of 042AKS066 is executed, so that n = 2. Become. At this stage, since the process of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 40-5 is executed, as shown in FIGS. 40-13 (a-26) and (c-26), the big hit medium effect and the number of rounds corresponding to the first R are performed. The display is made (see also Figure 40-6).

Next, when the big winning opening is completely opened and the game ball wins the big winning opening as shown in FIG. 40-13 (b-27), unlike the case of the 1st R, the step of FIG. 40-5 In the process of 042AKS060, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 40-13 (a-27), and the number of acquired "0165" is displayed as shown in FIG. 40-13 (a-28). Further, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 40-13 (b-27), and in addition to lighting the effect lamp 9 corresponding to the effect during the big hit, FIG. 40-13 (c-27). ), The attacker lamp 9c lights up. In this way, in rounds other than the 1st R, the number of winnings is updated and displayed during the predetermined period even if the prize is won during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second R elapses, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 40-5 is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 40-14 (a-30), "2R" indicating that the second round is performed. The number of rounds is displayed, and the big hit middle production corresponding to the 2nd R is executed. In this case, the number of "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Further, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses. Further, in the feature unit 042AK of this embodiment, an example of executing a common big hit medium effect regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to the lighting control of the effect effect lamp 9) is shown, but it is executed in each round. The production during the big hit may be different. The same applies to the lighting of the effect lamp 9. In this way, since the large winning opening is opened before the number of rounds indicating that it is the second round is displayed, the player's game ball that has been continuously fired from the first round is released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize opening. Therefore, in each round of the plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game balls fired in succession will be won in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 40-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the large winning opening is controlled to be open corresponding to the second R, and FIG. 40-13 (a-29). ), (B-29), and (c-29) show that when a predetermined period has passed without the game ball winning after the large winning opening is completely opened, FIG. 40-14 (a-31). ), (B-31), and (c-31), the number of acquisitions acquired in the first R is continuously displayed as it is. After that, the same processing is performed until the final round determined in advance, and when it is determined that the hit end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. 40-5, a big hit middle effect corresponding to the round is performed in order to perform the ending effect. Set to end. In this way, for the second and subsequent rounds, if the prize is not won during the predetermined period, the number of winnings displayed in the previous round is continuously displayed, while the prize is won during the predetermined period. Is displayed by adding the number of acquired balls to the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round. Therefore, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening.

For example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game is played. As shown in FIGS. 40-15, the big hit game state may end while the ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). .. In this case, at the start of the 1st R in the case of the next big hit (when the big winning opening corresponding to the 1st R is opened), the game ball will win the big winning opening, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R A game ball wins. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 40-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner of notifying that the winner has been won, and after the lapse of the predetermined period, FIGS. 40-11 (a-20) and FIG. As shown in (a-21), after performing the count-up display, "0015" may be displayed as the acquired number display. Further, in such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will further win a prize during the predetermined period (the second ball may win a prize), and in that case, after the predetermined period elapses, FIG. As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after the count-up display is performed, "0030" may be directly displayed without displaying "0000" or "0015" as the acquisition number display. According to this, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the game entertainment.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquisitions by the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 40-5 after a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened and the first round is started. Then, if the game ball does not win the big prize opening within the predetermined period after the first round is started, a predetermined display indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased is performed after the predetermined period, and the first round is performed. If a game ball wins a large prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of one round, the number of acquisitions is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

Further, when the game ball wins a large prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, the effect control CPU 120 directly specifies the number of acquisitions of "0000" as a predetermined display. Display the number of acquisitions of "0015" as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as a notification display that the number of acquisitions will increase if the game ball wins the large winning opening within a predetermined period after the first round is started. , Display the number of acquisitions of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of acquisitions increases.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command indicating that the large winning opening is open, which is transmitted from the main board 11 side in response to the opening of the large winning opening. Is started, and the number of acquisitions is displayed after the lapse of a predetermined period. According to this, since the predetermined period is suitably counted and the specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 closes the large winning opening door to guide the launched game ball through the second path of the upper part of the large winning opening door to the discharge path. By opening the winning opening door, the launched game ball is guided to the large winning opening through the first path and detected by the count switch 23. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured such that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. .. According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period from the opening of the big winning opening, and the game is enjoyed without giving the player anxiety. Can be prevented from decreasing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-6, the effect control CPU 120 strikes right as shown in FIG. 40-7 (a-3) between the time when the big hit is reached and the time when the big winning opening is opened. By performing the production, the player is informed that he / she should hit right. According to this, since the game area to be launched during the big hit is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

The open state of the large winning opening is a state in which the large winning opening is completely open, that is, the large winning opening is moved to a position where the large winning opening is completely open, and the large winning opening is opened. A command for specifying that the large winning opening is open is transmitted from the main board 11 side in response to the detection that the vehicle has moved to a completely open state. According to this, since the predetermined period is counted after the large winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

In addition, the big prize opening is also open for the game ball (early hit game ball) that was launched by performing the right-handed effect before the 1st R started (before the big winning opening was opened). If it exists in the upper part of the large winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win a prize within a predetermined period corresponding to the first R, and if a prize is won within the predetermined period, the effect control CPU 120 is specified after the predetermined period. The number of acquisitions is displayed as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game ball hit early from being wasted.

Further, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game is played. As shown in FIGS. 40-15, the big hit game state may end while the ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). .. In this case, at the start of the 1st R in the case of the next big hit (when the big winning opening corresponding to the 1st R is opened), the game ball will win the big winning opening, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R When a game ball is won, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquisitions as a specific display after the lapse of the predetermined period. According to this, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a fanfare effect suggesting that the big hit game state has been reached from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening. Then, after the big winning opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of winnings, and it is possible to perform a big hit middle production corresponding to the round game. According to this, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by adding sharpness to the production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120 is used when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened. As shown in FIG. 40-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 40-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening other than the predetermined period, the attacker lamp is also shown in FIG. 40-12 (c-23). Turn on 9c. According to this, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and it is possible to visually recognize that the prize has been won within the predetermined period. It will be easier.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 40-5 (the same applies to step 042AKS064), for example, a unit of the game effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light in the big hit medium effect. Light is emitted in a mode that is greater than the number of light emission per hour (a mode for notifying that a prize has been won). According to this, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120 is concerned when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened. Outputs the winning sound corresponding to the winning. Further, as shown in FIG. 40-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening other than the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. According to this, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the first and subsequent rounds in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 40-5 after a predetermined period after the round is started. Do. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning consecutively fired game balls in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

Further, when the second and subsequent round games are performed, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in the figure when the game medium does not win the big prize opening within a predetermined period after the big winning opening is opened. As shown in 40-14 (a-31), when the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed, while the game medium wins the big prize opening within the predetermined period. 40-14 (a-30) shows the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round game by adding the number of acquired balls given in response to the winning. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening even after the second round.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, for example, even when an over-winning occurs, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 40-12 (a-23), and the number of acquired "0165" is displayed. In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings are displayed according to the tenth prize, the count-up display and the number of winnings corresponding to the over-winning are displayed, but FIG. 40-12 (b-25). As shown in the above, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from the time when the large winning opening is completely closed to the time before the opening state corresponding to the second R is reached. According to this, since the update of the acquired number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the acquired number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 40-10 (c-18), the game is played during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is not displayed. Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball wins the big prize opening, in the situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, for example, FIG. 40-11 (c-20) and ( As shown in c-21), the effect lamps 9 provided on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and more than during the predetermined period. The effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the production after that and improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-6, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect before the start of the first round, and even after the large winning opening is opened, a predetermined period of time is reached. The effect lamps 9 may be turned on in sequence as shown in FIGS. 40-7 (c-3) to 40-9 (c-13) to suggest right-handed strikes, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As shown in FIGS. 40-11 (c-20) and (c-21), for example, the effect lamp 9 provided in the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect effect provided in the game board 2. The lamps 9 are turned on alternately. According to this, it is possible to suggest right-handed striking by using the effect lamp 9. Further, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the large winning opening is opened to suggest a right-handed strike, after the last lit attacker lamp 9c is turned on, it is shown in FIG. 40-9 (c-15). The lights may be turned on as they are without being turned off as in the above-mentioned manner, and according to this, the player can be made aware that the big winning opening is in the open state.

In addition, the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because sufficient time is secured for winning.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIGS. 40-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period elapses, that is, until the number of acquisitions is displayed. In addition, the effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and as shown in FIGS. 40-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect lamp 9 is emitted after the display of the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. Let me. According to this, it is possible to suppress the early hitting by the player and promote the firing timing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect control CPU 120 emits the effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution timing of the effect during the big hit after the elapse of a predetermined period. Let me. According to this, the production can be excited at once at the timing when the production during the big hit is executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-21, the effect control CPU 120 suggests right-handed display of an effect that shifts and displays a decorative pattern or a star-shaped image constituting a big hit at the timing when the number of acquisitions is displayed. Perform in a mode. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should hit the right side, and the player can easily recognize that the player should hit the right side.

(Modification example of feature part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 40-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the effect lamps 9 are turned on in order, suggesting that the effect lamp 9 should be right-handed. An example is shown in which all the effect lamps 9 are turned off after the right-handed effect by the effect lamp 9 is completed, but this is an example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 40-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), FIGS. 40-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), (c-16A). As shown in FIG. 40-16 (c-16A) at the timing (FIG. 40-16 (b-16A)) when the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. The attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be turned on. According to this, the player can easily visually recognize that the big winning opening is in the open state. The attacker lamp 9c may be continuously lit until a predetermined period elapses or during the opening period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the round display is updated from the first round to the second round, the number of "1" in the number of rounds of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". , "R" is continuously displayed from the first round, and "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses, but this is just an example. is there. For example, as shown in FIG. 40-17, the display of "1" in the display of "1R" is deleted at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the large winning opening is closed. , "R" may be displayed only. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed, and the round display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round may be performed. The same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, the end of each round can be visually recognized, and the game can be sharpened.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of winnings that is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is 10 (the upper limit winning number is 10). For example, the upper limit winning is set to 1. , If two pieces are entered during the predetermined period before the number of rounds is displayed, an over prize may be given. In this case, as the over-winning winning sound during the predetermined period, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over-winning sound) may be output, and the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of over-winning. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, an example of counting the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is shown for displaying the number of acquisitions, but in addition to this, the winning to the general winning opening 10 during the big hit is also counted. May be good. Since right-handed hits are made during the big hit, the general winning opening for winning is the general winning opening 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIG. 40-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in the case of counting the winning of the general winning opening 10 during the big hit. The description of the same parts as those in FIGS. 40-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIGS. 40-18, when it is determined in step 042AKS056 that the prize designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), a general prize indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the general prize opening 10 is further obtained. It is determined whether or not the designated command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when the general winning opening 10 is won (step 042AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS081; Yes). Step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or when the general winning designation command has not been received, that is, when there is no winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process proceeds to the process of step 042AKS059. In addition, along with winning the general winning opening 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 (a winning sound different from the case where the large winning opening is won) may be output.

Further, in the various display processes shown in FIGS. 40-18, when it is determined in step 042AKS062 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS062; No), it further indicates that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether or not the general prize designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when the general winning opening 10 is won (step 042AKS083; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS083; Yes). Step 042AKS083), the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed (step 042AKS085). Even when the acquisition number update display in step 042AKS085 is performed, the acquisition number display is performed after the count-up display (notification display that the acquisition number increases) is performed. After executing the process of step 042AKS085, or when the general winning designation command has not been received, that is, when there is no winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the process proceeds to the process of step 042AKS065. In addition, along with winning the general winning opening 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 (a winning sound different from the case where the large winning opening is won) may be output.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the case of counting the winning of the general winning opening 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-19 and 40-20. 40-19 and 40-20 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation display in the image display device 5, an open / closed state of a large winning opening, and a lighting state of various lamps. (A-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in FIG. 40-19 are shown in FIG. 40-10 ( The same applies to a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the big winning opening is opened, the counting of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When the game ball wins the general winning opening 10, the state shifts to the states shown in FIGS. 40-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 as shown in FIG. 40-19 (b-18A), or from the state shown in FIG. 40-19 (b-17), the game ball is also generally used in the large winning opening. When time elapses without winning the winning opening 10 and a predetermined period elapses as shown in FIGS. 40-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), the game ball wins a general prize. When a prize is won in the mouth 10, the state shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 40-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in FIG. 40-20 (a-20A). , The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is displayed, and the count-up display is performed. Further, at the same timing as these displays, as a big hit middle effect (1st R middle effect), as shown in FIG. 40-20 (a-20A), a decorative pattern constituting the big hit is displayed or "BOUNUS is in progress" is displayed. , And the character are displayed. In the jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 40-20 (c-20A), the effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the number of acquisitions.

On the other hand, when the predetermined period elapses without the game ball winning the general winning opening 10, as shown in FIG. 40-20 (a-22A), the count-up display is not performed and the number of acquisitions is displayed as "0000". Is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as the big hit middle production (1st R middle production), the decorative symbols constituting the big hit are displayed, "BOUNUS" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 lights up according to the light emission pattern set in advance according to the effect during the big hit are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won.

As described above, even when the game ball wins the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined setting is the same as in the above embodiment. After the elapse of the period, "0003" is displayed as the number of acquisitions in response to the winning of the general winning opening 10. If no game ball is also won in the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that the prize ball has not been awarded. Therefore, even for the game balls that have won the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period, the number of winnings corresponding to the winning is displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being anxious.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the feature unit 042AK is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and displays the display contents on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win. A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game), and the display means can display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game). (For example, the number of acquisitions is displayed), when the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. After the lapse of time, the grant amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the gaming medium is the variable winning means within the predetermined period. If the player does not win a prize, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display), and the above. When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within a predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.), which is characteristic.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display. (For example, "0015" may be displayed instead of "0000").

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means is given the gaming value when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period. After performing the count-up display indicating the above, the display according to the game value given as the specific display is performed (for example, the count-up display which is a notification display that the number of acquisitions increases is performed, and then “0015”. , Etc.), may be done.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of acquisitions increases.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means is a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state. After the elapse of the predetermined period after reception, the display of the grant amount display is started (for example, counting of the timer value for the predetermined period is started from the timing when the designated command for opening the large winning opening sent from the main board 11 side is received. Etc.), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable winning means is the first path (for example, large) that guides the game medium to the winning path by being in the first state. By opening the winning opening door, the launched game ball passes through the first path and leads to the big winning opening, etc.), and in the second state, the game medium is guided to the discharge path. A route forming means including two routes (for example, by closing the grand prize entrance door, the launched game ball is passed through the second route of the upper part of the grand prize entrance door and led to the discharge route). And a detection means (for example, a count switch 23) formed in the winning path to detect the winning of the game medium, and the time from the path forming means to the detecting means of the game medium is within the predetermined period. (For example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Etc.), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the large winning opening is detected within a predetermined period from the opening of the large winning opening, and the player can enjoy the game without giving anxiety. It is possible to prevent a decrease.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means becomes the first state, the player is asked. An operation promotion display is performed to promote the operation (for example, a game is played by performing a right-handed effect as shown in FIG. 40-7 (a-3) between the time when the big hit is reached and the time when the big winning opening is opened. (Indicate to the person what should be right-handed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state is a state in which the variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example,). The open state of the large winning opening is a state in which the large winning opening is completely open, that is, the large winning opening is moved to a position where the large winning opening is completely open, and the large winning opening is opened. In response to the detection that the machine has moved to a completely open state, a command for specifying that the large winning opening is open is transmitted from the side of the main board 11).

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the large winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above, the operation promotion display is performed before the first round game in the advantageous state is started. When the launched game medium wins the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, a game ball launched by performing a right-handed effect before the first R is started). However, it is possible to win a prize at the timing when the large winning opening is opened, and if a prize is won within the predetermined period, the number of winnings is displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game medium launched before the start of the round game from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above, in the last round game of the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, the variable winning means is the first. When the state changes from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state ends with the game medium sandwiched (for example, in the final round, as shown in FIG. 40-15, the eleventh game ball is a special variable winning ball. The first round game when the device 7 (more specifically, the big hit game state ends while being sandwiched between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a) is controlled again to the advantageous state. When the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state and the gaming medium in the sandwiched state wins the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period ( For example, in the case of the next big hit, the game ball wins the big winning opening at the start of the first R, and after a predetermined period of time, the number of acquisitions is displayed as a specific display).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, until the variable winning means is controlled from the advantageous state and the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. , It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the machine is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare effect suggesting that the game is in a big hit game state from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening). (It is possible, etc.), along with the start of the display of the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period, it is possible to execute the round game display capable of identifying the round game being executed and the in-round effect corresponding to the round game. (For example, after the big winning opening is open and a predetermined period has passed, the number of rounds can be displayed together with the number of winnings, and a big hit middle production corresponding to the round game can be executed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by adding sharpness to the production.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 043AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 043AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the feature unit 043AK is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and displays the display contents on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win. When,
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. The display means can display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, acquisition). When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed (such as displaying a number), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. The grant amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period. If not, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display), and the predetermined period is displayed. When the game medium wins the variable winning means, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display). Further, the light emitting means (for example, the effect lamp 9 or the like) and the light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 or the like) are further provided. The light emitting means is controlled by a light emitting pattern corresponding to the winning of the game medium depending on whether the variable winning means is won or the game medium wins the variable winning means before the lapse of the predetermined period. For example, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period).

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the prize is won within the predetermined period. Is easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins the variable winning means. Etc.) and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, an effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and the light emission of the specific light emitting means when the game medium wins the variable winning means. A game other than the attacker lamp 9c, which emits light from the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (similarly to step 042AKS064) in a production during a big hit. The effect lamp 9 may emit light in a manner larger than the number of times of light emission per unit time (such as in a mode of notifying that a prize has been won).

According to this configuration, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above is further provided with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the sound output means is used when the game medium wins the variable winning means. The winning sound corresponding to the winning is output to, and the winning is performed even when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means after the elapse of the predetermined period or when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means before the elapse of the predetermined period. A sound may be output (for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, a winning sound is output regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period).

According to this configuration, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 044AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 044AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the feature unit 044AK is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and displays the display contents on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win. A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game), and the display means can display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game). It is possible to display a round game display that can identify the round game being executed (for example, display the number of rounds), and the first of the multiple round games. When the game is played, the grant amount display and the round game display corresponding to the first round game are displayed after a lapse of a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of rounds and the number of winnings are displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the second and subsequent rounds of the plurality of round games are displayed. When the game is played, the round game display corresponding to the second and subsequent round games is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the second round, the number of rounds is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and if the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the predetermined period After the lapse of time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display), and the game medium is variable within the predetermined period. When a prize is won in the winning means, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquired number display) after the lapse of the predetermined period.

According to this configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the game interest without giving anxiety to the player, and in each round of a plurality of round games. , It is possible to increase the possibility of winning consecutively fired game balls in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, when the second and subsequent round games are performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. If the game medium does not win the variable winning means, the grant amount display displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed (for example, when the second and subsequent round games are performed, the game medium is displayed continuously. If the game medium does not win the big prize opening within a predetermined period after the big winning opening is opened, it is displayed in the previous round game as shown in FIG. 40-14 (a-31). When the second and subsequent round games are performed, the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state within a predetermined period of time. When the game medium wins the variable winning means, the grant amount corresponding to the prize is added from the grant amount display displayed in the previous round game. (For example, when the game medium wins the big winning opening within a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 40-14 (a-30), the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game is displayed. , The number of winning balls given in response to the winning is added and displayed, etc.).

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the large winning opening even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means can update and display the given amount display being displayed in response to the winning of the game medium in the variable winning means. Yes, the update display of the grant amount display ends once the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state and then ends until the first state is changed again (for example, the large winning opening is completely closed). The count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from the closing to the opening state corresponding to the second R).

According to this configuration, since the update of the acquisition number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the acquisition number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning. ..

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 045AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 045AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the feature unit 045AK is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and displays the display contents on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win. A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game), and the display means can display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game). (For example, the number of acquisitions is displayed), when the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. After the lapse of time, the grant amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the gaming medium is the variable winning means within the predetermined period. If the player does not win a prize, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display), and the above. When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within a predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. , Etc.), a plurality of light emitting means (for example, the effect lamp 9), and a light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120), and the light emitting control means is the variable winning means. Is the first state and the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the variable winning means is the first state and the grant amount display before the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed. Is controlled to emit light more than when is not displayed (for example, during a predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the acquired number is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 40-10 (c-18)). , Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball wins the big prize opening, the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed. In this situation, for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the effect lamp 9 and the game board 2 provided in the frame 3 for the multi-game machine are provided. The effect lamps 9 are turned on alternately to emit more light from the effect lamps 9 than during a predetermined period).

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the production after the event is performed and improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, an operation promotion display for encouraging the player to operate is displayed after the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means is in the first state. It is possible (for example, right-handed display is performed), and the light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c or the like) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means. ) And a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, an effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and when the variable winning means is in the first state, the said before the elapse of the predetermined period. When the imparted amount display is not displayed, the predetermined light emitting means is made to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the operation promotion display while the specific light emitting means is made to emit light, and the given amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period is displayed. When there is, the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are made to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, after the large winning opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, FIG. 40-7 (c-3). )-As shown in FIGS. 40-9 (c-13), the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on to suggest right-handed strikes, and after a predetermined period of time, for example, FIGS. 40-11 (c-20) and (c). As shown in -21), the effect lamps 9 provided on the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 were alternately turned on, and the large winning opening was opened. Later, when the effect lamps 9 are turned on in sequence to suggest a right-handed strike, after the attacker lamp 9c that is turned on last is turned on, it is not turned off as shown in FIG. 40-9 (c-15), but remains lit. Etc.), you may do so.

According to this configuration, the operation can be promoted by using the predetermined light emitting means, and the player can be made aware that the variable winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, in the round game, one of the round games is completed by winning a specific number of game media, and the game shifts to the next round game. (For example, the maximum period during which the large winning opening can be opened by winning 10 gaming balls is reached.) The time from the lapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means is in the second state is It is a sufficient time for the game medium to win the specific number (for example, for the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened, it is sufficient to count after a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. (For example, during a long period of time).

According to this configuration, a sufficient time is secured for winning, so that the player can feel reassured.

(4) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, in the round game, one round game is completed when a specific number of game media wins, and the game shifts to the next round game (for example, 10 pieces). The game medium is the time from the lapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means is in the second state. It is a sufficient time for a specific number of prizes to be won (for example, for the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened, it is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Etc.), when the variable winning means is in the first state, when the grant amount display before the lapse of the predetermined period is not displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted, and the grant after the lapse of the predetermined period is performed. After the amount display is displayed, the light emitting means is made to emit light (for example, until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period elapses, that is, until the number of acquisitions is displayed, FIGS. 40-9 (c-16) to ( As shown in c-19), the effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and as shown in FIGS. 40-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. (For example, the effect lamp 9 is made to emit light).

According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting quickly and promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (4) above, the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state, and is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests (for example, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect), and at the same time as the display of the grant amount display is started after the lapse of the predetermined period, the round game that is being executed can be specified. It is possible to execute the display and the effect during the round corresponding to the round game (for example, the number of rounds is displayed, the number of acquisitions is displayed, and the effect during the jackpot is performed after a predetermined period of time), which is the same as the execution timing of the effect during the round. The light emitting means is made to emit light at the timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect effect lamp 9 is made to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the effect during the big hit). , You may do so.

According to this configuration, the production can be excited at once at the timing when the production is executed during the round, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, a general winning means (for example, a general winning opening 10) capable of winning a prize in a game medium is further provided, and the display means is described above. The amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the general winning means can be displayed as the given amount display (for example, the number of winnings is displayed in response to the winning of the general winning opening 10). If the gaming medium does not win the general winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example,). For example, if the game ball does not win in the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that the prize ball has not been given), and the game medium is displayed within the predetermined period. When a prize is won in the general prize-winning means, a display corresponding to the prize in the general prize-winning means is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened). When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 10, after the lapse of the predetermined period, "0003" is displayed as the number of winnings in response to the winning in the general winning opening 10). May be good.

According to this configuration, even when the general winning means is won during the predetermined period, the display corresponding to the winning of the general winning means is displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being anxious.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in a gaming area (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7 is placed in a gaming area on the right side). The display means can display a first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot) at the same timing as the imparted amount display, and the first image is in the advantageous state. The effect is displayed at the same timing as the imparted amount display (for example, the effect display for operating the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot is performed), and the effect display is displayed in a manner suggesting the predetermined area (for example, the effect display). The decorative pattern constituting the jackpot may be moved in the right-back direction, the front, and the left-back direction to be displayed in a manner suggesting right-handed hitting).

According to this configuration, the effect display suggests a game area to be fired, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the game area to be fired.

(Explanation of First Form of Feature 20SH)
Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature unit 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 41-1 to 41-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first aspect of the feature unit 20SH, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is displayed, and the number of prize balls granted in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number. It is possible to display the acquisition number notification display and. The characters used in the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used for displaying the acquired number, the background image during the big hit is invisible from the specific area. As for the specific characters used in the acquired number notification display, the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first form of the feature unit 20SH having such features will be described. The description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Background technology related to the first form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 41-1 is a diagram showing a background technique related to the first form of the feature portion 20SH.

When the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 41-1 (A), the pachinko gaming machine may display the number of winnings displayed with respect to the number of prize balls given in the jackpot gaming state. In the example shown in FIG. 41-1 (A), the number of acquired balls is displayed as "point 120" corresponding to the number of acquired balls being 120.

In the winning number display, a number for displaying the number of prize balls and a character other than the number for recognizing that the winning number is displayed are used. The numbers used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like. In the display of the number of acquisitions shown in FIG. 41-1 (A), the characters "point" for recognizing that the display is the number of acquisitions and the number "120" for displaying the number of prize balls are displayed. It is used.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters in which a specific area is formed. Here, the specific area is an area surrounded by a line forming a character and does not lead to an area outside the line forming the character. Here, "not connected to the area outside the line forming the character" means that the "specific area" is completely isolated from the "area outside the line forming the character" by the "line forming the character". And when the "specific area" is not completely separated from the "area outside the line that forms the character" by the "line that forms the character", but at first glance it appears to be a different area. ,including. In the following description, a character in which a specific area is formed is referred to as a "specific character".

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of the Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", the substantially circular area surrounded by the curve forming the character is the specific area. The Arabic numeral "8" forms two specific regions. In the case of the Arabic numeral "4", the triangular area surrounded by the three straight lines forming the character is the specific area.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 41-1 (A), the pachinko gaming machine displays the jackpot medium background image related to the jackpot gaming state in the entire display area of the image display device. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 41-1 (A), a background image during a big hit in which a "butterfly" is flying is displayed. The big hit medium background image is an image displayed on the back side of the other displays displayed on the image display device in the big hit game state. The background image during the jackpot contains many lines expressing animation pictures and effects.

The acquired number display is displayed small in the edge area in the display area of the image display device, which does not impair the visibility of the background image during the big hit. If the big hit medium background image changes over time, the line of the big hit medium background image may overlap the back of the acquired number display. Then, when a specific character is displayed on the acquired number display, a big hit is made on the back of the specific area of the specific character as shown by the "0" part of the Arabic numeral surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 41-1 (A). When the lines of the middle background image overlap, the lines of the big hit middle background image may be assimilated with the lines forming the specific characters, and the specific characters may appear different from the original characters.

FIG. 41-1 (B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 41-1 (A). In the examples shown in FIGS. 41-1 (A) and 41-1 (B), the line of "Chou" in the background image of the jackpot overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used for displaying the number of acquisitions. The line of "Chou" in the background image during the big hit is assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" looks like the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the character of the acquired number display is mistaken for a character different from the original character, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line included in the big hit medium background image so that the line of the big hit medium background image does not overlap the specific area of the specific character.

The first form of the feature portion 20SH is made in view of such a background. Hereinafter, the first form of the feature unit 20SH will be described.

(Display of the number of acquisitions in the first form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 41-2 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the first embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

In the first form of the feature unit 20SH, among the Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions, the specific area 20SHI1 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific character is , It is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 forming characters. In the example shown in FIG. 41-2 (A), the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS1 used for displaying the number of acquisitions is "black", whereas "0", "4", and "6" corresponding to specific characters are used. , "8", "9", the specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white".

Further, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character, and the character is displayed to such an extent that the specific area 20SHI1 and the line 20SHS1 forming the character can be accurately distinguished. Any display mode may be used as long as it has a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a high contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a texture having a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Among the characters used to display the number of winnings, the numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the number of prize balls and the specific characters among the characters other than the numbers for recognizing that the number of winnings is displayed are also shown in FIG. 41- Like the Arabic numerals shown in 2 (A), the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Display of acquired number notification in the first form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 41-2 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for the acquisition number notification display in the first embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

When the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays an acquisition number notification display for notifying that fact.

Here, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are the jackpot game states before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed or the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. However, for example, the number of time reduction control and probability variation control may be different for each jackpot type, and in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high amount executed after the jackpot game state ends. The certainty control and the time saving control may be continuously executed after the end of the big hit game state until the big hit occurs again. In such a case, the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the consecutive villa state, when the number of prize balls given in the multiple big hit game states in the consecutive villa state reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays an acquisition number notification display for notifying that fact. To do.

In the acquisition number notification display, when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state is reached, a number other than a number for displaying the predetermined number and a character other than the number for recognizing that the acquisition number notification display is used. And are used. The numbers used for displaying the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

Among the characters used for the acquisition number notification display, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the first embodiment of the feature unit 20SH, as shown in FIG. 41-2 (B), the specific area of the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 41-2 (B), among the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters are specified. Region 20SHI2 is displayed in a transparent display mode.

Among the characters used for the acquisition number notification display, when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches, it is a number other than the Arabic numeral for displaying the predetermined number, or the acquisition number notification display. As for the specific characters among the characters other than the numbers to be recognized, the specific area is displayed in a transparent display mode as in the Arabic numerals shown in FIG. 41-2 (B).

(How to see the acquired number display in the first form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 41-3 (A) is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display in the first form of the feature unit 20SH is displayed. FIG. 41-3 (B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 41-1 (A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 41-3 (A) and 41-3 (B), the "butterfly" line of the big hit medium background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquired number display 20SHK. However, since the specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white", the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI1. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI1, the line 20SHHS of the "butterfly" in the background image during the big hit is not assimilated with the line 20SHS1 forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" is accurately regarded as the Arabic numeral "0". Can be recognized.

In addition to the acquired number display 20SHK, the image display device 5 has a jackpot display 20SHO for recognizing that the jackpot game state is controlled, and a jackpot combination that is derived and displayed when the jackpot game state is controlled. The decorative symbol display 20SHZ indicating the fixed decorative symbol, the round number display 20SHR indicating the number of rounds of the round game in the jackpot game state, and the right-handed display 20SHM suggesting that the player should hit right are displayed. Has been done. The jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also located in the edge area in the display area of the image display device 5 that does not impair the visibility of the background image during the jackpot, as in the acquisition number display 20SHK. It is displayed small.

The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are the same types of characters as those used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number display. Characters of a type different from the characters used for the numerical notification display may be included. In this embodiment, "number" and "katakana" are used as the characters of the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH as shown in FIG. 41-4. On the other hand, in the jackpot display 20SHO, "alphabet" and "kanji", which are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display, are used. Further, in the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, "number" which is the same kind of character as the character used for the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display is used. Further, the round number display 20SHR is different from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, which are the same type of characters as the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. "Alphabet", which is a kind of character, is used. Further, in the right-handed display 20SHM, "Kanji", "Hiragana", and "Symbol", which are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display, are used.

Among the characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM, there are characters corresponding to specific characters regardless of the type of the characters. The specific area of the specific character used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM is also a non-transparent display mode and the characters are displayed in the same manner as the specific area 20SHI1 of the acquired number display 20SHK. Since the line 20SHS1 to be formed is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode, the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI1.

(Example of production operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 41-4 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41-4 (A), the display area of the image display device 5 is the first display area 20SH51 and the area around the first display area 20SH51, which is the first display area. Various displays are performed by distinguishing the second display area 20SH 52, which is narrower than the 20SH 51. In the example shown in FIG. 41-4 (A), the region inside the alternate long and short dash line is the first display area 20SH51, and the region outside the alternate long and short dash line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 41-4 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays a big hit medium background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquired number display 20SHK on the front side of the big hit medium background image in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 41-4 (A), a jackpot display, a decorative symbol display, a round number display, and a right-handed display are also displayed in the second display area 20SH52.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. In FIG. 41-4 (A), since the acquired number display 20SHK with "point 990" is displayed, it can be recognized that 990 game balls have been paid out as prize balls in the jackpot game state. it can. The effect control CPU 120 updates the number of the acquired number display 20SHK every time the game ball is paid out in the big hit game state.

In such a situation, it is assumed that a game ball enters the large prize opening and 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

As shown in FIGS. 41-4 (B) to (G), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquired numbers 20SHK from "990" in response to the 15 game balls being paid out. Count up to "1005" one by one. In that case, the number of the acquired number display 20SHK goes through the so-called "Kiriban", which is a good number of "1000". In other words, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached "1000".

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display every time "1000" game balls are paid out in the big hit game state. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" when the number of prize balls in the big hit game state reaches "1000", and the number of prize balls in the big hit game state is "2000". Is displayed, the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over" is displayed.

When the number of the acquired number display 20SHK becomes “1000” of Kiriban, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the acquired number to the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 41-4 (D). Display 20 A part of SHKH is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 41-4 (E) to (G), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed in each frame of the image while the number of the acquired number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005". The display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is moved from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number of the acquired number display 20SHK becomes "1005", the effect control CPU 120 has the acquired number in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 41-4 (G). Notification display 20 SHKH is stopped and displayed. At this time, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed at least in the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

By such display control, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame in from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5.

Then, when a predetermined period elapses after the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is started, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 41-4 (H), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Move towards the left edge of the area.

By such display control, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and the display is displayed because it is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. finish.

The effect control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is started by displaying a part of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH when the number of the acquired number display 20SHK becomes "Kiriban", and from that timing. When the predetermined period elapses, the display control for ending the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may be performed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is started by stopping and displaying the acquired number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and a predetermined period from that timing. The display control for ending the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may be performed when the above has elapsed.

As described above, the specific area of the specific character used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 41-4 (E) to (H), the background image during the jackpot can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 41-4 (E) to (H), the background image during the jackpot is visible from the specific area of the Arabic numeral "0", which is a specific character used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41-4 (D) to (H), the characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHK are characters having a size larger than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK.

The effect mode when the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH 51 is not limited to the mode in which the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is framed in, stopped, and then framed out. For example, instead of the effect of frame-in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may be produced so as to pop out from the back side to the front side of the screen, or the acquired number notification display 20SHKH gradually emerges. It may be such an effect that the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a balloon indicating the character's dialogue when the character appears. Further, instead of the effect of frame-out the acquired number notification display 20SHKH, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may be sucked from the front side to the back side of the screen, or the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may gradually disappear. The effect may be such that when the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in the balloon indicating the character's dialogue, the character leaves.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first aspect of the feature unit 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the big hit middle background image corresponding to the big hit gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls given on the front side of the big hit middle background image in the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 notifies that the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" on the front side of the big hit medium background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. As the notification display 20SHKH, it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" when the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state reaches "1000", and the prize balls given in the big hit game state. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over". Then, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display. The characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH are characters having a size larger than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK. The characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH, the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display 20SHK including the specific character and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH can be suitably displayed in relation to the big hit medium background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state, he / she confirms the acquired number display 20SHK, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in a narrow second display area 20SH52 in small size characters and is specified. If the background image during the big hit is visible from the specific area of the character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but the background image during the big hit cannot be seen from the specific area of the specific character. Therefore, a specific character can be recognized accurately. Further, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is not always displayed in the jackpot game state unlike the acquisition number display 20SHK, but the game is played when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the person, and since it is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character. By doing so, it is possible to show the background image during the big hit as much as possible in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

Further, as described above, the specific character includes Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9".

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH using Arabic numerals can be suitably displayed in relation to the big hit medium background image.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 displays the acquired number notification display 20SHKH when displaying the acquired number display 20SHK.

According to such a configuration, even when the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state can be accurately grasped by the acquired number display 20SHK.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH becomes easily noticeable to the player, and it is possible to preferably notify that the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". ..

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the big hit display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM on the front side of the big hit medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. Is. The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are the same types of characters as those used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and the acquisition number display 20SHK and The acquired number notification display 20 includes characters of a type different from the characters used in SHKH, and each type of character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed. As for the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM, the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, the specific characters can be accurately recognized even for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number notification display 20SHKH by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51, and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51. When a predetermined period has elapsed since the setting, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is framed out.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of feature 20SH)
Next, the gaming machine according to the second form of the feature portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 41-5 to 41-7. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the feature unit 20SH, the specific character used for the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is a specific area with respect to the area of the line forming the character, rather than the specific character used for the acquired number display 20SHK. The proportion of the size of the part is small.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the feature unit 20SH having such features will be described. The description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Display of acquired number notification in the second form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 41-5 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for the acquisition number notification display in the second embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the feature unit 20SH uses three-dimensional characters for the acquisition number notification display. Here, the three-dimensional character is a character format that makes the character appear to protrude to the front side. The area of the line forming the three-dimensional character includes the area 20SHS21 for expressing the character and the area 20SHS22 for expressing the depth of the three-dimensional character.

Among such three-dimensional characters, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 41-5 (A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI3 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when the specific area 20SHI3 is displayed in front of the big hit medium background image, the big hit medium background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters)
FIG. 41-5 (B) is an explanatory diagram comparing the non-three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number and the three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number notification.

Comparing the non-three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number and the three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number notification, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional character and the area of the line forming the three-dimensional character are compared. The size of the area 20SHS21 for expressing characters is the same. Then, in the non-three-dimensional specific character, the region surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of the line region 20SHI1 forming the character becomes the specific region 20SHI1. On the other hand, in a three-dimensional specific character, since the area of the line forming the character includes the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character, it is located on the outline of the inner circumference of the area 20SHS21 expressing the character and the inner circumference side thereof. The outline of the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character and the area surrounded by the area 20SHI3 are the specific area 20SHI3. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific character used for the acquired number notification display is the area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the character on the inner peripheral side of the area 20SHS21 that expresses the character, rather than the non-three-dimensional specific character used for the acquired number display. The size of the specific area is reduced by the size, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character is small.

(A modified example of the acquired number notification display in the second form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 41-6 (A) is a diagram showing a modified example 1 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the feature unit 20SH.

In the example shown in FIG. 41-6 (A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, "0", "4", "6", "8", "9" corresponding to a specific character. When the specific area 20SHI4 of the above is displayed in "white" and displayed in front of the big hit medium background image, the big hit medium background image becomes invisible from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters in 1 in the modified example)
FIG. 41-6 (B) is an explanatory diagram comparing the non-three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number and the three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number notification in the first modification.

Also in the first modification, when the non-three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number and the three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number notification are compared, the size of the line region 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional character and the three-dimensional character are formed. The size of the area 20SH31 that expresses the characters in the area of the line is the same. Then, in the non-three-dimensional specific character, the region surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of the line region 20SHI1 forming the character becomes the specific region 20SHI1. On the other hand, in a three-dimensional specific character, since the area of the line forming the character includes the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character, the outline of the inner circumference of the area 20SH31 expressing the character and the character on the inner circumference side thereof. The outline of the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character and the area surrounded by the area 20SH32 are the specific area 20SHI4. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific character used for the acquired number notification display is the area 20SH32 that expresses the depth of the character located on the inner peripheral side of the character expressing area 20SH31 than the non-three-dimensional specific character used for the acquired number display. The size of the specific area is reduced by the size of the character, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character is small.

(A modified example of the acquired number notification display in the second form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 41-7 (A) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the feature unit 20SH.

In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 41-7 (A), the characters used for the acquisition number notification display have the area of the line forming the characters displayed in a three-color gradation, and the three-color gradation. It is displayed in any of the display modes A to G in which the combinations are different.

The area of the line forming the character of the display mode A is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "red", the central area 20SHSC is "orange", and the lower area 20SHSD is "yellow". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode B is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "orange", the central area 20SHSC is "yellow", and the lower area 20SHSD is "green". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode C is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "yellow", the central area 20SHSC is "green", and the lower area 20SHSD is "light blue". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode D is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "green", the central area 20SHSC is "light blue", and the lower area 20SHSD is "blue". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode E is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "light blue", the central area 20SHSC is "blue", and the lower area 20SHSD is "purple". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode F is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "blue", the central area 20SHSC is "purple", and the lower area 20SHSD is "red". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode G is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "purple", the central area 20SHSC is "red", and the lower area 20SHSD is "yellow".

The image display device 5 displays the mode of the characters used in the acquired number notification display as display mode A → display mode B → display mode C → display mode D → display mode E → display mode F → display mode G → display mode A → The display is changed over time in the order of ...

FIG. 41-7 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a color change accompanying the operation of the acquired number notification display in the modified example 2.

In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 41-7 (B), the acquired number notification display moves (frame-in) when the acquired number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. The speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes differs depending on whether the frame is out).

In the example shown in FIG. 41-7 (B), the acquired number notification display is moved (framed in) from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51 over 0.35 seconds. , The display mode A changes to the display mode D in order. After that, the acquired number display changes in order from the display mode D to the display mode G while being stopped and displayed at the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 for 1 second. After that, the acquired number notification display moves (frames out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left end of the display area of the image display device 5 over 0.35 seconds, in order from the display mode G to the display mode C. Change.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the feature unit 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the big hit middle background image corresponding to the big hit gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display regarding the number of prize balls given on the front side of the background image during the big hit in the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 notifies that the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" on the front side of the big hit medium background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. As a notification display, when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over", and the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over". Then, the acquired number display is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquired number notification display ends when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display. The characters used for the acquisition number notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display. The characters used for the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used for displaying the acquired number, the background image during the big hit cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. The specific character used for displaying the acquired number notification has a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character than the specific character used for displaying the acquired number.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display including the specific character and the acquired number notification display can be suitably displayed in relation to the big hit medium background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state, he / she confirms the number of winnings display, but the number of winnings is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and the specific characters are displayed. If the background image during the big hit is visible from a specific area, the specific character may look different from the original character, but by making the background image during the big hit invisible from the specific area of the specific character, It is possible to accurately recognize a specific character.

The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions are three-dimensional characters. The area of the line forming the three-dimensional character includes an area for expressing the character and an area for expressing the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the acquired number notification display.

Further, as described above, the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 as the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquired number display, but the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the player when it is done, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the size of the line areas 20SHS21 and 20SHS22 forming the characters. Since the ratio of the size of the specific area 20SHI3 to the specific area 20SHI3 is small, it is possible to suppress the risk of misidentifying the character even if the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character. By making the background image in the middle of the big hit visible from 20SHI3, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, as described above, the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI4 for the specific character used for the acquired number notification display in the modification 1.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquired number display, but the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the player when it is done, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and is a specific area with respect to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Because the ratio of the size of the characters is small, even if the background image during the big hit is invisible from the specific area of the specific character, it is not only possible to suppress the discomfort, but also the background image during the big hit is invisible from the specific area of the specific character. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the characters from being misidentified.

Further, as described above, in the character used for the acquisition number notification display in the modification 2, the area of the line forming the character is displayed with a gradation of three colors. Then, the image display device 5 displays the mode of the characters used for the acquired number notification display as display mode A → display mode B → display mode C → display mode D → display mode E → display mode F → display mode G → display mode. The display is changed over time in the order of A → .... Then, when the acquired number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquired number notification display is moving (frame in / frame out), the acquired number notification display is displayed. The speed at which the display mode changes is different.

According to such a configuration, the display mode changes according to the moving speed of the acquired number notification display, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(Explanation of Third Form of Feature 20SH)
Next, the gaming machine according to the third form of the feature portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 41-8 to 41-11. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third aspect of the feature unit 20SH, the ending background image of the specific characters used for the result display can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third form of the feature unit 20SH having such features will be described. The description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used for result display)
FIG. 41-8 is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for result display in the third form of the feature portion 20SH.

When the round game of the final round is completed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes an ending effect corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ending background image. Further, the image display device 5 displays a result display for notifying the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state when displaying the ending background image.

In the result display, a number for displaying the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state and a character other than the number for recognizing the result display are used. The numbers used for the result display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals and the like.

Among the characters used for result display, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the third form of the feature unit 20SH, as shown in FIG. 41-8, the specific area of the specific character used for the result display is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 41-8, among the Arabic numerals used for the result display, the specific area 20SHI5 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific character is transparent. It is displayed in the display mode of.

Among the characters used for the result display, the numbers other than the Arabic numerals for displaying the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state and the characters other than the numbers for recognizing the result display are also shown in FIG. 41. Specific areas are displayed in a transparent display mode, such as the Arabic numerals shown in −8.

(Various productions in the jackpot game state)
FIG. 41-9 is a diagram showing an example of the production period of various effects in the jackpot game state. FIG. 41-10 is a diagram showing an example of production operation of various effects in the jackpot game state.

When the hold information is stored in the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the hold in-house consecutive villa notice suggesting that the hold information is controlled in the jackpot game state in response to the stored hold information. is there. For example, in the case of a big hit game state of all 10 rounds, the effect control CPU 120 finishes the 9 rounds of the round game as shown in FIGS. 41-9 and 41-10 (A) to (B). At the timing T1 when the round game of 10 rounds, which is a round, is started, the notice of the pending Uchirenso will be started.

When the notice of the consecutive villas on hold is executed, the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 corresponds to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state as shown in FIG. 41-10 (B). On the front side of the background image during the big hit, the effect image of the notice of the pending villa is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 41-10 (B), the effect image 20SH of "flame" is displayed as the effect image of the notice of the consecutive villas on hold.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 41-10 (B), the "flame" line of the effect image overlaps the back side of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquired number display 20SHK. Since the specific area is displayed in "white", the effect image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. Therefore, the line of "flame" in the effect image is not assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0" in the specific area, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0". ..

Then, as shown in FIGS. 41-9 and 41-10 (B) to (C), at the timing T2 when the round game of the final round is finished and the ending effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 is on hold. End the notice of the consecutive villas and start the ending production. When the ending effect is started, the display of the ending background image is started at a predetermined brightness in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 41-10 (C), the ending background image in which the blizzard of cherry blossoms dances is displayed from the back of the screen in the first display area 20SH51. Further, on the front of the ending background image, the characters "big hit end" are displayed corresponding to the end of the big hit game state.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 finishes the notice of the pending villa before the display of the ending background image starts at the timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background image is displayed, the effect image 20SHE of the pending villa notice is not displayed. In other words, the effect video 20SHE of the pending villa notice is displayed when the ending background video is not displayed.

The ending background image may be at least an image displayed in the first display area 20SH51, and is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 as shown in FIG. 41-10 (D). It may happen. In the example shown in FIG. 41-10 (D), the blizzard of cherry blossoms displayed as the ending background image is flying over the entire screen.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 41-9 and 41-10 (D) to (E), at the timing T3 when the result display is started, the effect control CPU 120 sets the brightness of the ending background image to be higher than the predetermined brightness. The brightness is reduced to a specific darkness, and the progress of the ending background image is paused and displayed as a still image. Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the result display 20SHRE on the front side of the ending background image with a brightness brighter than the specific brightness of the still image of the ending background image. In the example shown in FIG. 41-10 (E), the fluttering cherry blossom blizzard is stationary, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white characters.

As described above, as for the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE, the specific area 20SHI5 is displayed in a transparent display. Therefore, the ending background image of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5.

As shown in FIGS. 41-10 (A), (B), and (E), the characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK. Further, the result display 20SHRE may be displayed at least in the first display area 20SH51, and is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 as shown in FIG. 41-10 (E). There may be things.

(Suggestion of setting by ending background video)
FIG. 41-11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the setting suggestion effect by the ending background image.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of the jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 36, the jackpot winning probability is changed by using the display result determination table according to the set value. The set value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", with "1" having the lowest ball output rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". The larger the value in the order of, the higher the ball output rate. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the larger the value is, the larger the value is in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low setting", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high setting".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third aspect of the feature unit 20SH is configured so that the set value can be changed and the above-mentioned ending background image can be displayed as a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which a blizzard of cherry blossoms dances from the back of the screen as shown in FIG. 41-11 (A) when the set value is set low. On the other hand, when the set value is set high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which a large amount of cherry blossom blizzard dances from the left and right cherry blossom trees in full bloom, as shown in FIG. 41-11 (B).

It should be noted that the setting suggestion by the ending background image does not have to definitively suggest whether the set value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the set value is set low, the ending background image of the mode shown in FIG. 41-11 (B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate, or when the set value is set high. In addition, the ending background image of the aspect shown in FIG. 41-11 (A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low ratio.

Further, the ending background image may have different production modes depending on whether the setting value "6" is the most advantageous for the player and the setting value is not "6". Further, the ending background image may have different production modes depending on whether the setting value is an odd number or an even number.

Here, the above-mentioned notice of the reserved villa is one of a plurality of types of notice effects for notifying the reliability of the jackpot, but the setting suggestion effect by the notice of the reserved villa is not executed.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the feature unit 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the big hit middle background image corresponding to the progress of the round game in the big hit game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state at least in the first display area 20SH51. Further, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 controls the jackpot game state in the second display area 20SH52 in response to the hold information stored on the front side of the jackpot medium background image. It is possible to display the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the pending villa that suggests that it will be done. Further, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls given on the front side of the big hit middle background image in the second display area 20SH52. Further, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 notifies the front side of the ending background image at least in the first display area 20SH51 of the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state. Display 20SHRE can be displayed. The characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK. The characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed. As for the specific characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the background image during the big hit and the effect image 20SHRE of the notice of the consecutive villas on hold are invisible from the specific area. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE, the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display 20SHK including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image during the big hit and the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the consecutive villas on hold, and the result display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be displayed. Can be suitably displayed in relation to the ending background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state, the acquired number display 20SHK is confirmed, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and is held. Since it may overlap with the effect video 20SHE of the villa notice, if the background video during the big hit or the effect video 20SHE of the pending villa notice is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character will look different from the original character. By making the background image during the big hit and the effect image 20SH of the notice of the pending villa invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51 and does not overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the pending villa notice, so that the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters. By making it possible, it is possible to show the ending background image as much as possible in the conspicuous display position of the first display area 20SH51.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set any of a plurality of types of set values "1" to "6" having different jackpot winning probabilities. Then, the image display device 5 can display the ending background image in a manner suggesting the set set value. The effect video 20SHRE of the notice of the villa in the hold is one of a plurality of types of notice effects for notifying the reliability of the jackpot, but the setting suggestion effect by the notice of the villa in the hold is not executed.

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the setting suggestion effect by the ending background image is executed. Therefore, it is significant that the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5 of the specific character used for the result display 20SHRE. Increase.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background image at a predetermined brightness. Then, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background image at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness at the timing T3 when the display of the result display 20SHRE is started, and at a brightness brighter than the specific brightness. Result display 20SHRE is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the result display 20SHRE can be improved.

(Explanation of the Fourth Form of Feature 20SH)
Next, the gaming machine according to the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 41-12 to 41-16. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth aspect of the feature unit 20SH, the remaining number of times of the ST number in the probabilistic state is displayed, and when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times is a predetermined number, the predetermined number of times is notified. It is possible to display the remaining number of times notification display. The characters used for the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific character used for displaying the remaining number of times, the background image during ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. As for the specific character used for the remaining number notification display, the background image during ST can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH having such features will be described. The description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Background technology related to the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 41-12 is a diagram showing a background technique related to the fourth form of the feature portion 20SH.

Basically, a pachinko gaming machine is a game in a normal state rather than a period in which a game is played in an advantageous state when comparing a state advantageous for a player such as a probabilistic state, a time saving state, and a jackpot game state with a normal state. It is designed to have a longer period of time.

For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when the upper limit number of hold information is stored regardless of whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, when the upper limit number of hold information is not stored. It is easier to execute shortened fluctuations with a shorter variable display time. Then, in the probabilistic state accompanied by the time reduction control, since the variable winning ball device changes to the open state, winning is more likely to occur than in the normal state, so that the shortening fluctuation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and faster than in the normal state. It is possible to advance the game. Therefore, the period during which the game is played in the normal state is longer than the period during which the game is played in the probabilistic state accompanied by the time reduction control.

In the probability variation control, one of the conditions, that is, when the special figure game of a predetermined number of ST times is executed after the end of the big hit game state or when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", is satisfied first. It ends when you do. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "big hit" when the probability variation control is being performed, the probability variation control ends when the special figure game of a predetermined number of ST times is exhausted. .. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the case where the time saving control is not performed. In the time saving control, one of the conditions that the special figure game of a predetermined number of time saving times is executed after the end of the big hit game state and that the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" is satisfied first. It ends when you do. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "big hit" when the time reduction control is being performed, the time reduction control ends when the special figure game of a predetermined number of time reductions is exhausted. .. The predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

The set value of the number of STs and the set value of the number of time reductions may be different values.

When the pachinko machine is controlled to the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 41-12 (A), the pachinko gaming machine may display the remaining number display regarding the remaining number of STs in the probabilistic state. In the example shown in FIG. 41-12 (A), the remaining number display of "30 remaining" is displayed corresponding to the remaining number of STs being 30.

In the remaining number display, a number for displaying the remaining number of ST times and a character other than the number for recognizing that the remaining number is displayed are used. The numbers used for displaying the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like. The remaining number display shown in FIG. 41-12 (A) is the characters "remaining" and "times" for recognizing that the remaining number is displayed, and "30" for displaying the remaining number of ST times. And the numbers are used.

Among the characters used for displaying the remaining number of times, there is a specific character in which a specific area is formed.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 41-12 (A), the background image during ST corresponding to the probabilistic state is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 41-12 (A), the background image during ST in a manner in which the screen is cracked is displayed. The background image during ST is an image displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the probabilistic state. The background image during ST contains many lines expressing animation pictures and effects.

The remaining number display is displayed small in the edge area in the display area of the image display device, which does not impair the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern. If the background image during ST changes over time, the line of the background image during ST may overlap the back of the remaining number display. Then, when a specific character is displayed on the remaining number of times display, ST is displayed on the back surface of the specific area of the specific character as shown by the Arabic numeral "0" part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 41-12 (A). When the lines of the middle image overlap, the lines of the background image during ST may be assimilated with the lines forming the specific characters, and the specific characters may appear different from the original characters.

FIG. 41-12 (B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 41-12 (A). In the examples shown in FIGS. 41-12 (A) and 41-12 (B), the line of the ST middle background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used for the remaining number display, and the ST middle background image. The line is assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" appears to be the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the character of the remaining number display is mistaken for a character different from the original character, the remaining number of ST times in the probabilistic state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line of the background image during ST so that the line of the background image during ST does not overlap the specific area of the specific character.

The fourth form of the feature portion 20SH is made in view of such a background, and the fourth form of the feature portion 20SH will be described below.

(Display of the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 41-13 is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for displaying the remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

In the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH, among the Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times, the specific area 20SHI6 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific character is , It is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS6 forming characters. In the example shown in FIG. 41-13, the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS6 used for displaying the remaining number of times is "black", whereas "0", "4", "6", and "6" corresponding to specific characters are used. When the specific area 20SHI6 of "8" and "9" is displayed in "white" and displayed in front of the background image during ST, the background image during ST becomes invisible from the specific area 20SHI6.

Further, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the moji, and the characters are displayed to such an extent that the specific area 20SHI6 and the line 20SHS6 forming the characters can be accurately distinguished. Any display mode may be used as long as it has a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS6 to be formed.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color having a high contrast with the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may have a high contrast with the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may have a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a texture having a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character.

Among the characters used for displaying the remaining number, the numbers other than the Arabic numerals for displaying the remaining number of ST times and the specific characters among the characters other than the numbers for recognizing that the remaining number is displayed are also shown in the figure. Like the Arabic numerals shown in 41-13, the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 41-14 is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for the remaining number notification display in the fourth embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays a remaining number of times notification display for notifying the predetermined number of times.

In the remaining number notification display, when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number, a number other than a number for displaying the predetermined number and a character other than a number for recognizing that the remaining number notification display is used. And are used. The numbers used for the remaining number notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 41-14, the remaining number notification display is displayed in a plurality of types having different transmittances. The remaining number notification display shown in FIG. 41-14 (A) is a display mode in which the area of the line forming the character of the remaining number notification display is not transparent and the background of the character cannot be seen from the line area. The remaining number notification display shown in FIG. 41-14 (B) is a display mode in which the area of the line forming the character of the remaining number notification display is transparent and the background of the character can be seen from the area of the line.

In addition, the remaining number notification display is displayed in three-dimensional characters. In the display mode in which the background of the character is not visible, the area of the line forming the three-dimensional character includes the area 20SHS71 expressing the character and the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the three-dimensional character. In the display mode in which the background of the character is transparent, the area 20SHS71 expressing the character is transparently displayed, and in the display mode in which the background of the character is not visible, the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the three-dimensional character is displayed. The area is displayed as the area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character.

Among such three-dimensional characters, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in FIGS. 41-14, among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the remaining number notification display, the specific areas of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters. The 20SHI7 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when it is displayed in front of the background image during ST, the background image during ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7.

As shown in FIG. 41-14, the specific area 20SHI7 of the remaining number notification display differs depending on whether the remaining number notification display is displayed in a non-transparent mode or a transparent mode. In the example shown in FIGS. 41-14, the remaining number notification display is displayed in a non-transparent manner, and since the area of the line forming the character includes the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the character, the area expressing the character. The area surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of the 20SHS71 and the outline of the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the characters located on the inner circumference side is the specific area 20SHI7. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 41-14 (B), the remaining number notification display is displayed in a transparent manner, and the area 20SHS71 expressing the character is transparently displayed, so that the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character is represented. The region surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of the region 20SHS72B is the specific region 20SHI7.

(How the remaining number of times is displayed in the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 41-15 (A) is a diagram showing how the remaining number display is displayed in the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH. FIG. 41-15 (B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 41-15 (A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 41-15 (A) and 41-15 (B), the line of the background image during ST overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the remaining number display 20SHST, but the specific area Since 20SHI6 is displayed in "white", the background image during ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI6, it is not assimilated with the line 20SHHS2 of the background image during ST, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0".

In addition to the remaining number display 20SHST, the image display device 5 displays the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability variation display 20SHRU for recognizing that the image display device 5 is controlled to the probability variation state. There is. The acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability variation display 20SHRU are also displayed small in the edge area in the display area of the image display device 5 that does not impair the visibility of the decorative pattern, as in the remaining number display 20SHST.

The characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability variation display 20SHRU are the same types of characters as those used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display, and the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display. It may contain characters of a different type from the characters to be used. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41-17, "number", "hiragana", and "kanji" are used as the characters of the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST. On the other hand, in the probability variation display 20SHRU, an "alphabet" which is a character different from the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST is used. Further, the acquired number display 20SHK includes a "number" which is the same type of character as the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST, and the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST. Different types of characters, "katakana", are used. In addition, the right-handed display 20SHM includes "hiragana" and "kanji", which are the same types of characters as those used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST, and the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST. "Symbols", which are different types of characters from the characters used, are used.

Among the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability variation display 20SHRU, there are characters corresponding to specific characters regardless of the type of the characters. The specific area of the specific character used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability variation display 20SHRU is also a non-transparent display mode like the specific area 20SHI6 of the remaining number display 20SHST, and the line 20SHS6 forming the character Since the display mode is different from the display mode, the background image during ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6.

(Example of effect operation of remaining number display and remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 41-16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number notification display in the fourth embodiment of the feature unit 20SH. FIG. 41-17 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display in the first embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

As shown in FIGS. 41-17, the effect control CPU 120 displays the remaining number display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 41-17 (A) to 41-17, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number for displaying the remaining number of STs of the remaining number display 20SHST each time the variable display is executed. Let me display it.

As shown in FIGS. 41-16 and 41-17 (A) to 41-17 (B), the effect control CPU 120 starts a variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number of times. The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying a predetermined number of times is started in a display mode that does not transmit. For example, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the number of times when the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, or 10 times is started. The display of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is started to be displayed in a non-transparent display mode. As shown in FIGS. 41-17 (B) to (D), the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST are characters having a size larger than the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 41-17, the acquired number display 20SHK is also displayed when the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, but the remaining number notification display 20SHST is a display in which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. It is displayed in a display area different from the area. Then, as shown in FIGS. 41-16 and 41-17 (B) to (C), when the first period elapses after the display of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is started, the effect control CPU 120 remains. The display mode of the number-of-times notification display 20SHSTH is changed from a non-transparent display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 41-16 and 41-17 (B) to (E), when the second period elapses after changing the display mode of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control CPU 120. The display of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is terminated.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute variable display based on a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns having different variable display times.

The remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number of times. Therefore, if the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, the remaining number of STs may be misidentified.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the first period and the remaining number notification display 20SHST are displayed in a display mode that does not transmit the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH so that the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH can be terminated in one variable display. The total period with the second period displayed in the transparent display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the variation pattern of the shortest variable display time.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 41-16, in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, even if the variable display based on any kind of fluctuation pattern is executed, the variable display is executed. In the one variable display, the display of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH can be terminated.

Here, the first display area 20SH51 includes the above-mentioned "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. On the other hand, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed on the front side of the identification information at least in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the first display area 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the non-transparent remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the display result may not be recognized.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the first period of displaying in a display mode that does not transmit the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is the type of variation pattern having the shortest variable display time so that the display result of the variable display can be recognized. It is set to end before the timing when the display result in the variable display of is derived.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 41-16, in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, even if the variable display based on any kind of fluctuation pattern is executed, the variable display is executed. The display result of the variable display can be preferably recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 41-17 (D), the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived, but the display mode of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is transparent. Since it has changed, the identification information in the background of the character can be visually recognized from the area of the line forming the character of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH.

In this embodiment, the change in the display mode of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number notification display 20SHST is displayed in a display mode in which the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is transparent when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. However, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is a predetermined number, the remaining number of times is temporarily stopped when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notification display 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent display mode.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth aspect of the feature unit 20SH can be controlled to a probabilistic state accompanied by a time saving control capable of advancing the game faster than the normal state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the background image during ST in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display the remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of STs in the probabilistic state on the front side of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 notifies the remaining number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number on the front side of the background image during ST at least in the first display area 20SH51. As the display 20SHST, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "60" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is 60 times, and the remaining number display 20SHST indicating "60" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is 50 times. It is possible to display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "50". Then, the remaining number display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed. On the other hand, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH ends the display when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display. The characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHST are characters having a size larger than the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST. The characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. As for the specific characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST, the background image during ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, the background image during ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7.

According to such a configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST including the specific characters and the remaining number notification display 20SHST can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image during ST. For example, when the player confirms the remaining number of STs in the probabilistic state, he / she confirms the remaining number display 20SHST, but the remaining number display 20SHST is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52. If the background image during ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but the background image during ST cannot be seen from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character. By doing so, it is possible to accurately recognize a specific character. Further, the remaining number notification display 20SHST is not always displayed like the remaining number display 20SHST, but is predetermined in the sense of alerting the player that the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is a predetermined number. It is displayed only for a period of time, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area 20SH51. Therefore, by making the background image during ST visible from the specific area 20SHI7 of the specific characters, the first In the conspicuous display position of the display area 20SH51, it is possible to show the background image during ST as much as possible.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back surface can be seen through the line portion forming the characters. is there.

According to such a configuration, the background image can be visually recognized while the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, so that unnecessary stress can be prevented from being applied to the player.

Further, as described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the decorative symbol can be visually recognized while the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily stressed. ..

Further, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display mode transparent to the display.

According to such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls given. Then, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area in which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the acquired number display 20SHK from being lowered due to the display of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH.

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player determines the pachinko gaming machine 1. The present invention is also applied to a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when a combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to an operation of a stop button. It is possible.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 20SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the first aspect of the feature unit 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). The display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5 and the like), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and around the first display area. The area includes a second display area that is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and the first display area 20SH51. The display means includes, for example, a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means displays a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. It can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display a big hit medium background image corresponding to the big hit gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and the second display. In the area, it is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value on the front side of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. The number of winning balls displayed 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls given can be displayed on the front side), and at least in the first display area, the amount of value given for gaming is set to a predetermined amount on the front side of the background image. As a notification display for notifying that the value has been reached, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of the game value to be given has reached the first predetermined amount and a notification that the amount of the game value to be given has reached the second predetermined amount. It is possible to display a second notification display to be notified (for example, in the image display device 5, at least in the first display area 20SH51, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot gaming state is displayed on the front side of the jackpot medium background image. As the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH that notifies that the number of "Kiriban" has been reached, when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" is displayed. It is possible to display, and when the number of prize balls granted in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over", etc.), and the grant amount display is It is updated every time the game value is given in the advantageous state (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK is paid by the game ball as a prize ball in the big hit game state. The notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the display was started (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed after the display is started). The characters used for the notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display (for example, used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH). The characters to be used are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, etc.), and the characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display have a specific area surrounded by a line forming the characters. The characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters to be formed (for example, the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.). The background image of the specific character used for the grant amount display is invisible from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquired number display 20SHK cannot see the background image during the big hit from the specific area. The background image of the specific character used for the notification display can be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH can be visually recognized from the jackpot medium background image from the specific area. It is characterized by being possible).

According to such a configuration, the grant amount display and the notification display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image. For example, when the player confirms the amount of the game value given in the advantageous state, he / she confirms the amount of grant, but the amount of grant is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area. , If the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, It is possible to accurately recognize a specific character. In addition, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the grant amount display, but is meant to congratulate the player when the amount of game value added in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period, and is displayed in large size characters in a wide first display area. Therefore, by making the background image visible from a specific area of a specific character, it is called a first display area. It is possible to show the background image as much as possible at a conspicuous display position.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific character includes the Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8 and 9 (for example, the specific characters are the Arabic numerals "0", "4" and " 6 ”,“ 8 ”,“ 9 ”, etc.) may be included.

According to such a configuration, the grant amount display and the notification display using Arabic numerals can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the display means displays the notification display when the grant amount display is displayed (for example, the image display device 5 is the acquired number). When the display 20SHK is displayed, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even when the notification display is displayed, the amount of the game value given in the big hit game state can be accurately grasped by the grant amount display.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3), the display means can display the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, an image). The display device 5 may display the acquired number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52).

According to such a configuration, the notification display becomes easily noticeable to the player, and it is possible to preferably notify that the amount of the game value added in the advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4), the display means can display a specific display relating to the advantageous state on the front side of the background image in the second region (5). For example, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, the right-handed display 20SHM, etc. on the front side of the jackpot medium background image in the second display area 20SH52). , The characters used for the specific display include characters of the same type as the characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display, and characters of a type different from the characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display. , Each type of character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed (for example, used for a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative pattern display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, and a right-handed display 20SHM. The characters to be used include characters of the same type as those used for the acquired number display 20SHK and acquired number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of a type different from the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH. Characters of the same type also include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed), and the specific characters used for the specific display cannot see the background image from the specific area. (For example, the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are such that the jackpot medium background image cannot be visually recognized from a specific area).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to accurately recognize a specific character even for a specific display.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the feature unit 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and is a display means. (For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means is a first display area and an area around the first display area. A second display area narrower than one display area is included (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and the first display area 20SH51, and is the first display area 20SH51. The display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, including a second display area 20SH 52, which is narrower than the above). , The image display device 5 can display a big hit medium background image corresponding to the big hit gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52), and the background image in the second display area. It is possible to display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value on the front side of the (for example, the image display device 5 is granted to the front side of the big hit medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. (The display of the number of winning balls related to the number of prize balls can be displayed, etc.), at least in the first display area, a notification that the amount of game value to be given has reached a predetermined amount on the front side of the background image. As a display, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be given has reached the first predetermined amount, and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be given has reached the second predetermined amount. (For example, in the image display device 5, at least in the first display area 20SH51, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot gaming state reaches the number of "Kiriban" on the front side of the background image during the jackpot. As the acquisition number notification display for notifying that the game has been performed, it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", and the jackpot game state. When the number of prize balls given in the above reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over", etc.), and the given amount display has a gaming value in the advantageous state. It is updated every time it is given (for example, the number of acquisitions is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state), and the notification display is shown in the table. The display ends when a specific period elapses from the start of the display (for example, the acquired number notification display ends the display when a predetermined period elapses after the display starts), and the notification display The character used for is a character having a size larger than the character used for the given amount display (for example, the character used for the acquisition number notification display is a character having a size larger than the character used for the acquisition number display). The characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, used for the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display). The characters to be used include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed), and the specific character used for the given amount display cannot see the background image from the specific area. Yes (for example, the specific character used for displaying the number of acquisitions is that the background image during the big hit is invisible from the specific area, etc.), and the specific character used for the notification display is the specific character used for the given amount display. The ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character is smaller than that of the character (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display is a character than the specific character used for the acquisition number display. The ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character is small, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the grant amount display and the notification display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image. For example, when the player confirms the amount of the game value given in the advantageous state, he / she confirms the amount of grant, but the amount of grant is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area. , If the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, It is possible to accurately recognize a specific character.

(7) In the game machine of the above (6), the character used for the notification display is a three-dimensional character (for example, the character used for the acquisition number notification display is a three-dimensional character, etc.), and the three-dimensional character is used. The area of the line to be formed may include an area for expressing a character and an area for expressing the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification display.

(8) In the gaming machine according to (6) or (7), the specific character used for the notification display is such that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display). The background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is not always displayed in the advantageous state like the grant amount display, but when the grant amount of the game value given in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount, the game is played. It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the person, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Because the background image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, not only can the risk of misidentifying the character be suppressed, but also the background image can be visually recognized from a specific area of the specific character, which has a directing effect. Can be enhanced.

(9) In the gaming machine according to (6) or (7), the background image of the specific character used for the notification display is invisible from the specific area (for example, the acquisition number notification display in the modification 1). The specific characters used in the above may be such that the background image during the jackpot is invisible from the specific area 20SHI4).

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquired number display, but the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the player when it is done, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and is a specific area with respect to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Since the ratio of the size of the characters is small, not only can the discomfort be suppressed even if the background image cannot be seen from the specific area of the specific character, but also the background image cannot be seen from the specific area of the specific character. Can be prevented from being misunderstood.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above, the display means can change the mode of the notification display to a specific mode (for example, the image display device 5 is the number of acquisitions. The notification display 20SHKH can be stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and when the specific period elapses after the mode of the notification display changes to the specific mode, the mode of the notification display is displayed. The acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed out when a predetermined period elapses after the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51. Things, etc.), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the game machine of the above (10), in the character used for the notification display, the area of the line forming the character is displayed in a plurality of kinds of colors (for example, a modification relating to the second form of the feature portion 20SH). The character used for the acquired number notification display in 2 is that the area of the line forming the character is displayed in a gradation of three colors, etc.), and the display means changes the combination of the plurality of types of colors over time. (For example, the image display device 5 displays the mode of the characters used for the acquired number notification display in display mode A → display mode B → display mode C → display mode D → display mode E → display mode F → Display mode G → display mode A → ..., which is changed over time, etc.), and the notification display is displayed in a mode different from that of the specific mode. The speed at which the combination of the plurality of types of colors changes differs depending on whether or not the combination is used (for example, when the acquired number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquired number notification display is stopped. The speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes differs depending on whether or not is moving (frame-in / frame-out)).

According to such a configuration, the display mode changes according to the moving speed of the notification display, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the feature unit 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state capable of advancing the game faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine 1. The display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with the image display device 5 and the like), the display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with the image display device 5 and the like). The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, an image display device). The display area 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51). The background image corresponding to the special state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 has the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. , ST background image can be displayed, etc.), and in the second display area, the variation number display regarding the variation number in the special state can be displayed on the front side of the background image (for example, an image display device). In the second display area 20SH52, the remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of ST times in the probabilistic state can be displayed on the front side of the background image during ST), at least in the first display area. On the front side of the background image, the number of fluctuations is notified when the value of the number of fluctuations is a predetermined value, and the number of fluctuations is notified when the value of the number of fluctuations is the first predetermined value. It is possible to display a first number of times notification display and a second number of times notification display for notifying the number of fluctuations when the value of the number of fluctuations display becomes a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 has at least the first number. 1 In the display area 20SH51, when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times on the front side of the background image during ST, it is indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST as the remaining number of times notification display 20SHST to notify the predetermined number of times. The remaining number notification display 20SHSTH that notifies "60" when the remaining number of times is 60, and the remaining number notification display 20SHST that notifies "50" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is 50 times. , Etc.), the variable number display is changed every time the variable display is executed. New (for example, the remaining number display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed, etc.), and the number notification display ends when a specific period elapses from the start of the display (for example, the remaining number display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed). For example, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends the display when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display), and the characters used for the number of times notification display are larger than the characters used for the fluctuation number of times display. It is a large-sized character (for example, the character used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHST is a character of a size larger than the character used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST, etc.), and is used for the fluctuation number of times display and the number of times notification display. The characters used include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH are surrounded by the lines forming the characters. The background image of the specific character used for displaying the number of fluctuations is invisible from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for displaying the remaining number of times 20SHST is a specific area). The specific characters used for the number-of-times notification display are visible from the specific area (for example, the background image during ST is invisible from 20SHI6) (for example, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH). The specific character is characterized in that the background image during ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7).

According to such a configuration, the variation number display including the specific character and the number notification display can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of fluctuations in the special state, the number of fluctuations is displayed, but the number of fluctuations is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area, and the number of fluctuations is displayed from the specific area of the specific character. If the background image is visible, the specific character may look different from the original character. However, by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be recognized accurately. be able to. In addition, the number of times notification display is not always displayed like the number of fluctuations display, but is limited to a specific period in the sense of alerting the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the number of fluctuations display will be a predetermined number of times. Since it is displayed and is displayed in large size characters in a wide first display area, by making the background image visible from a specific area of the specific character, in a conspicuous display position called the first display area, It is possible to show the background image as much as possible.

(13) In the game machine of the above (12), the display means can display the characters used for the number-of-times notification display in a transparent mode in which the image on the back surface can be seen through the area of the line forming the characters. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back surface can be seen through the line portion forming the characters. etc).

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be visually recognized while the number-of-times notification display is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily stressed.

(14) In the gaming machine of the above (13), the first display area includes a variable display area in which variable display of identification information is performed (for example, the first display area 20SH51 is "left", "middle", The "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.), the display means can display the number-of-times notification display on the front side of the identification information in the variable display area (for example,). , The image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the identification information can be visually recognized while the number-of-times notification display is displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being applied to the player.

(15) In the gaming machine of the above (14), when the identification information is recognizable, the display means displays the number-of-times notification display in the transparent mode (for example, the image display device 5 is variable). When the display result of the display is derived and displayed, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even if the identification information is recognizable when the number-of-times notification display is displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In any of the gaming machines (12) to (15), the display means can display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value (for example, the image display device 5 can display the grant amount display). , The acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls can be displayed, etc.), and the number-of-times notification display is displayed in a display area different from the display area in which the awarded amount display is displayed (for example, image display). The device 5 displays the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area in which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the imparted amount display from being lowered due to the display of the number-of-times notification display.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first aspect of the feature unit 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). The display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5 and the like), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and around the first display area. The area includes a second display area that is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and the first display area 20SH51. The display means includes the second display area 20SH52, which is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means has advanced the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 corresponds to the progress of the round game in the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The background image during the jackpot can be displayed (for example, the background image can be displayed), and at least in the first display area, the second background image corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least the second background image). In the first display area 20SH51, the ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state can be displayed, etc.), and when the second background image is not displayed, in the second display area, the said A specific suggestion video that suggests the progress of the game can be displayed on the front side of the first background video (for example, the image display device 5 can display the ending background video in the second display area 20SH52 when the ending background video is not displayed. , The effect video 20SH of the notice of the pachinko machine on hold, which suggests that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state in response to the stored hold information, can be displayed on the front side of the background image during the big hit, etc.), In the second display area, it is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value on the front side of the first background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display the grant amount display in the second display area 20SH52. On the front side of the background image during the jackpot, it is possible to display 20 SHK of the number of winning balls related to the number of prize balls given), and when the second background image is displayed, at least in the first display area. Notifying the front side of the second background image of the amount of gaming value granted in the advantageous state. The result notification display can be displayed (for example, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 gives the ending background image to the front side of the ending background image in a jackpot game state at least in the first display area 20SH51. The result display 20SHRE that notifies the total number of prize balls has been displayed, etc.), and the characters used for the result notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display (for example,). The characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, etc.), and the characters used for the grant amount display and the result notification display are based on the lines forming the characters. The characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include the specific characters in which the enclosed specific area is formed (for example, the characters used in the result display 20SHRE include the specific characters in which the specific area surrounded by the lines forming the characters is formed. Etc.), the first background image and the previous term specific suggestion image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area as the specific character used for the given amount display (for example, the specific character used for the acquired number display 20SHK is the specific area. (The background image during the big hit and the effect image 20SHRE of the notice of the pending villa are invisible, etc.), and the specific characters used for the result notification display are the second background image visible from the specific area. (For example, the specific character used in the result display 20SHRE is such that the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5).

According to such a configuration, the grant amount display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the first background image and the specific suggestion image, and the result notification display including the specific characters can be displayed with the second background image. It can be preferably displayed in relation to each other. For example, when the player confirms the amount of the game value given in the advantageous state, he / she confirms the amount of grant, but the amount of grant is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area and is specified. Since it may overlap with the suggestion video, if the first background video or the specific suggestion video is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character. By making the background image during the big hit and the specific suggestion image invisible from the specific area of the above, it is possible to accurately recognize the specific character. On the other hand, the result notification display is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestion image. Therefore, by making the second background image visible from the specific area of the specific character, the result notification display can be visually recognized. It is possible to show the second background image as much as possible in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(18) In the gaming machine of the above (17), a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages for the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot winning probability). It is possible to set any one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6"), and the display means suggests a setting value set by the setting means. The second background image can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display the ending background image in a mode that suggests the set value), and the specific suggestion image is It is one aspect of a plurality of types of suggestion images that suggest the advantageous state, and does not suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, the effect image 20SHRE of the pending villa notice announces the jackpot reliability. Although it is one of multiple types of notice effects, the setting suggestion effect due to the pending villa notice is not executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the setting value may be suggested by the second background image, so that it is significant that the second background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used for the result notification display. Will increase.

(19) In the gaming machine according to (17) or (18), the display means starts displaying the second background image at a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 has an ending background at a predetermined brightness). At the timing of starting the display of the result notification display, the second background image is paused and displayed at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and the specific brightness is displayed. The result notification display is displayed with a brightness brighter than the brightness (for example, the image display device 5 pauses the ending background image at a specific brightness darker than a predetermined brightness at the timing T3 when the display of the result display 20SHRE is started. The result display 20SHRE is displayed at a brightness brighter than a specific brightness, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the result notification display can be improved.

(Explanation of feature 19SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature unit 19SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 42-1 to 42-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the feature unit 19SH is scheduled to display the number of prize balls obtained when the game ball enters the big prize opening in the big hit game state and to give the image display device 5 in the big hit game state. It is possible to display the number of planned acquisitions and the total number of prize balls. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the display of the number of planned acquisitions invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the planned acquisition number display when the planned acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over-winning effect before the expected acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the feature unit 19SH having such features will be described. The description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Direction operation when a prize occurs during a round game)
FIG. 42-1 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a prize is generated during a round game. FIG. 42-2 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 42-1 (A), the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment displays the number of acquisitions 20SHK when the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state, and the game ball is a big prize opening in the big hit game state. 20SHK1 for displaying the number of prize balls given by entering the box, and 20SHK2 for displaying the total number of winning balls scheduled to be given in the jackpot game state are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 42-1 (A), the acquired number display 20SHK is such that the acquired number display 20SHK is "135" in the numerator with the central convoluted line "/" separated, as in "135/1500". It is arranged and displayed in the form of a fraction in which "1500" is arranged and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is arranged. That is, in the acquired number display 20SHK shown in FIG. 42-1 (A), the number of prize balls given when the game ball enters the big winning opening in the big hit game state is 135, and it is given in the big hit game state. It shows that the total number of prize balls to be awarded is 1500.

Further, also in this embodiment, the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5, and the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, and the round number display 20SHR are displayed in the second display area 20SH52. , Right-handed display 20SHM is also displayed. Further, the image display device 5 displays a background image during the jackpot in which the character 20SHCA appears in response to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 42-2, the big hit middle background image is displayed on the display layer arranged on the back side of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed.

When the prize ball is given by the game ball entering the big prize opening in the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquisitions according to the effect mode as shown in FIGS. 42-1 (B) to (F). Update the value of 20SHK.

When the prize ball is given by the game ball entering the big prize opening in the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 first forms a special winning opening as shown in FIG. 42-1 (B). The display of the effect display is started in the display area near the position of the variable winning ball device 7. Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is arranged at the lower right position of the image display device 5 when viewed from the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 42-1 (B), the effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK can be visually recognized, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42-1 (C), the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. In the example shown in FIG. 42-1 (C), since the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF whose display is started is displayed at the lower right end of the display area. Moving upwards in the area. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 42-1 (C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases with movement. Even at this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK can be visually recognized, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42-1 (D), the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. Here, as shown in FIG. 42-2, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on the display layer arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible, but as shown in FIG. 42-2 (D), the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 42-1 (D), the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible due to the movement of the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is recognized. A part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible as long as it cannot be done. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK may be difficult to see.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK as shown in FIGS. 42-1 (D) to (E) and 44-2 (D) to (E). As a result, when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball enters the large prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 42-1 (D) to (E) and 44-2 (D) to (E), the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, as shown in FIG. 42-1 (F), the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF. In the example shown in FIG. 42-1 (F), it is possible to confirm that the acquired number display 20SHK has been visually recognized by the end of the display of the effect display 20SHEF, and that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 has been updated. it can.

According to such an effect mode, the effect display 20SHEF can be first noticed by displaying the effect display 20SHEF. Then, as the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the attention to the acquired number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. At that time, it is possible to preferably recognize that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 that has been attracting attention has been updated.

(Example of production operation when over-winning occurs)
FIG. 42-3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an over-winning occurs. FIG. 42-4 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled so that when the tenth game ball enters the large winning opening in one round game, the large winning opening is closed. At this time, 11 A so-called over-winning may occur in which the first gaming ball enters the large winning opening following the tenth gaming ball. When an over-winning occurs, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the acquired number display 20SHK according to the effect mode as shown in FIG. 42-3.

When an over-winning occurs, the effect control CPU 120 first forms a large winning opening as shown in FIGS. 42-3 (A) to (B), as in the case where the tenth winning is generated. The display of the effect display is started in the display area close to the position of the special variable winning ball device 7. In the example shown in FIG. 42-3 (B), the effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK can be visually recognized, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42-3 (C), the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. In the example shown in FIG. 42-3 (C), since the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF whose display is started is displayed at the lower right end of the display area. Moving upwards in the area. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 42-3 (C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases with movement. Even at this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK can be visually recognized, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42-3 (C), the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquired number display 20SHK by the effect display 20SHEF before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. Before it becomes invisible or difficult, an over-winning effect for notifying that an over-winning has occurred is started. In the example shown in FIG. 42-3 (C), the over-winning effect video in which the character CHCB appears is displayed on the image display device 5.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect by another effect device as an over-winning effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 42-3 (C), the effect control CPU 120 outputs an over-winning sound in a mode different from the normal winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as the over-winning effect. In the example shown in FIG. 42-3 (C), the over-winning sound with the "picone picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the attacker lamp 9c to emit light in a light emitting mode different from the normal sound at the time of winning as an over-winning effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42-3 (D), the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. Here, as shown in FIG. 42-4, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on the display layer arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible, but as shown in FIG. 42-4 (D), the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 42-3 (D), the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible due to the movement of the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is recognized. A part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible as long as it cannot be done. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK may be difficult to see.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 42-3 (D) to (E) and 42-4 (D) to (E), the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. As a result, when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. In the examples shown in FIGS. 42-3 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 42-4 (D) to (E), the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the expected acquired number is displayed. The value of 20SHK2 has been updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF as shown in FIG. 42-3 (F). In the example shown in FIG. 42-3 (F), the acquired number display 20SHK is visible because the effect display 20SHEF is finished, and the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. You can confirm that.

According to such an effect mode, the effect display 20SHEF can be first noticed by displaying the effect display 20SHEF. Then, as the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the attention to the acquired number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to be seen by the effect display 20SHEF, by updating the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2, the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquired number. When the display 20SHK becomes visible, it is possible to preferably recognize that the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2, which have been attracting attention, have been updated.

In particular, when an over-winning occurs, not only the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 but also the value of the planned winning number display 20SHK2 is updated, so that the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state is given by the over-winning. It is possible to preferably recognize that the number of prize balls has increased by the number of prize balls.

After finishing the display of the effect display 20SHEF, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over-winning effect as shown in FIG. 42-3 (G). In the example shown in FIG. 42-3 (G), the display of the over-winning effect image displayed on the image display device 5 as the over-winning effect is finished, and the background image during the big hit in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed.

(Suggestion of setting by over winning production)
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of the jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 36, the jackpot winning probability is changed by using the display result determination table according to the set value. The set value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", with "1" having the lowest ball output rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". The larger the value in the order of, the higher the ball output rate. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the larger the value is, the larger the value is in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low setting", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high setting".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the set value can be changed, and the above-mentioned over-winning effect can be executed as the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value. For example, when the setting value is low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over-winning effect image in which the character CHCB appears on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 42-5 (A), and displays the “picone”. The over-winning sound with "picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the set value is set high, the effect control CPU 120 displays the over-winning effect image in which the character CHCC appears on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The over-winning sound with "Pee Po" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect by the over-winning effect does not have to definitively suggest whether the set value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the set value is set low, the over-winning effect of the mode shown in FIG. 42-5 (B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, or when the set value is set high. In addition, the over-winning effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 42-5 (A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

Further, the over-winning effect may be different depending on whether the set value "6" is the most advantageous for the player and the set value is not "6". Further, the over-winning effect may be different depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number.

(When there are rounds where the specified number of prizes have not been won and rounds where over prizes have occurred)
FIG. 41-6 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when there are a round in which a predetermined number of prizes have not been won and a round in which an over prize has occurred in the feature unit 19SH.

As described above, the open state of the jackpot game state is continued until the elapsed timing of the predetermined period or the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot reaches the predetermined number, whichever is earlier. ..

In the examples shown in FIGS. 42-6 (A) to (B), although there were 9 prizes in the round game of 1 round, before the number of game balls that entered the large winning opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have passed, the 1-round round game is completed and the 2-round round game is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 42-6 (B), the number of acquisitions displayed as "135/1500", 20SHK, is displayed in response to the fact that nine prizes were won during the round game of one round. ing. In this example, it is assumed that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the round game of 10 rounds is executed is 1500.

Then, in the two-round round game, the number of game balls that entered the large winning opening reached ten, the two-round round game was completed, and even in the three-round round game, there were ten prizes. And. That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls have been awarded in the round games of the 2nd and 3rd rounds. In that case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 42-6 (C).

Then, it is assumed that an over prize has occurred in the round game of 3 rounds. In that case, as shown in FIG. 42-6 (D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and the over-winning effect is executed when the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42-6 (E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquired number display 20SHK invisible or difficult, but when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquired number display is displayed. The value of 20SHK is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 42-6 (F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF is completed, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, in the round games of 4 rounds to 10 rounds, it is assumed that the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches 10 and the round games of each round are completed. In that case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 42-6 (G).

Then, when the round game of all 10 rounds is completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 42-6 (H), and the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state is 1500 by the result display 20SH. Is notified.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the 10-round round game is executed was 1500, but the over-winning occurred in the 3-round round game, so that the final prize was obtained. The value of 20SHK2, which is the number of planned acquisitions, is "1515". However, since there were only nine prizes in the round game of one round, the value of the final number display 20SHK1 is "1500" instead of "1515".

According to such an embodiment, when there are a round in which a predetermined number of prizes has not been won and a round in which an over-winning has occurred, the value of the number of acquisitions displayed 20SHK1 is smaller than the value of the number of planned acquisitions 20SHK2. By confirming the final number of winnings display 20SHK, it is easy to understand that there were rounds in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and there were rounds in which over-winning occurred.

FIG. 41-7 is a diagram showing another example of the effect operation when there are a round in which a predetermined number of prizes have not been won and a round in which an over prize has occurred in the feature unit 19SH.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 42-7 (A) to (B), although there were 9 prizes in the round game of 1 round, before the number of game balls that entered the large winning opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have passed, the 1-round round game is completed and the 2-round round game is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 42-7 (B), the number of acquisitions displayed as "135/1500", 20SHK, is displayed in response to the fact that nine prizes were won during the round game of one round. ing. In this example, it is assumed that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the round game of 10 rounds is executed is 1500.

Then, in the two-round round game, the number of game balls that entered the large winning opening reached ten, the two-round round game was completed, and even in the three-round round game, there were ten prizes. And. That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls have been awarded in the round games of the 2nd and 3rd rounds. In that case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 42-7 (C).

Then, it is assumed that an over prize has occurred in the round game of 3 rounds. In that case, as shown in FIG. 42-7 (D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and the over-winning effect is executed when the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42-7 (E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquired number display 20SHK invisible or difficult, but when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquired number display is displayed. The value of 20SHK1 is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 42-7 (F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF is completed, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is not updated and remains "1500".

Then, in the round games of 4 rounds to 10 rounds, it is assumed that the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches 10 and the round games of each round are completed. In that case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 42-7 (G).

Then, when the round game of all 10 rounds is completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 42-7 (H), and the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state is 1500 by the result display 20SH. Is notified.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the 10-round round game is executed is 1500, but the over-winning occurs in the 3-round round game. However, the value of the final planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since there were only nine prizes in the round game of one round, the value of the final number display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to such an embodiment, when there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes has not been won and a round in which an over-winning has occurred, there is no sense of discomfort due to the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2. be able to.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 19SH can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a special variable winning ball device 7 that can be changed into an open state in which the game ball is easy to win and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from the closed state to the open state and then changed to the closed state when controlled to the big hit game state. .. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an effect control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-winning effect when an over-winning occurs in one round game. Then, the image display device 5 displays 20 SHK1 for displaying the number of prize balls given by the game ball entering the special variable winning ball device 7, and the acquisition for the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state. It is possible to display the planned number display 20SHK2. In addition, the image display device 5 can display the effect display 20SHEF that makes the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs. Further, the image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to be seen by the effect display 20SHEF. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over-winning effect before the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, a sense of incongruity occurs when the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, as compared with the case where the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated while the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is visible. Can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect by the image display device 5 and the effect by the speakers 8L and 8R as the over-winning effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the over-winning effect.

Further, as described above, when the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and displays the effect. The 20SHEF is moved to make the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the fact that the game ball has entered the special variable winning device 7 can be expressed by the display effect on the image display device 5, and the interest can be improved. Further, since the effect display 20SHEF makes not only the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 but also the acquisition number display 20SHK1 invisible or difficult, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of discomfort.

Further, as described above, the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed. When the effect display 20SHEF reaches the area, it becomes invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are naturally in sight. Therefore, due to the attention paid to the effect display 20SHEF, it is possible to pay attention to the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 in the state before the value is updated.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over-winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquired number display 20SHK2 are displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that an over-winning has occurred by executing the over-winning effect, so that a sense of incongruity may occur when the planned number of acquisitions display 20SHK2 is updated. It can be suppressed more effectively.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set any of a plurality of types of set values "1" to "6" having different jackpot winning probabilities. Then, the image display device 5 can execute the over-winning effect in a manner of suggesting the set set value.

With such a configuration, attention can be raised to the over-winning effect.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over-winning effect after the display of the effect display 20SHEF is completed.

According to such a configuration, the updated value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 can be visually recognized while the over-winning effect continues, so that a sense of incongruity caused by the update of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2. Can be suppressed more effectively.

(Modification example of feature 19SH)
The gaming machine related to the feature unit 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, by executing such a power supply stop processing, the CPU 103 can play the game before the power failure after the power failure is restored. You can continue.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 does not back up various data for advancing the effect. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 cannot continue the effect based on the game information before the power failure after the power failure is restored.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like during the round game, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the effect corresponding to the round game after the power failure is restored. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 in the round game after the power failure is restored, or concretely such as "??? / ????" The acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed in a mode in which the value is not displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the effect display 20SHEF because the image display device 5 does not execute the effect corresponding to the round game even if a prize is generated in the round game after the power failure is restored. .. On the other hand, if it is possible to identify that the over-winning has occurred in the one-round round game after the power failure is restored, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the over-winning effect by the image display device 5, while the speakers 8L and 8R And the attacker lamp 9c can be used to produce an over-winning effect. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that an over-winning has occurred, for example, by an effect control command that notifies that the over-winning has occurred.

According to such a configuration, in a situation where the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power failure is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed so that a sense of incongruity does not occur. On the other hand, if an over-winning occurs, it is possible to notify that fact.

(Explanation of means related to feature 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.) and is displayed. Variable means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), which can be changed into a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win. The winning means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can be changed into an open state in which the game ball is easy to win and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win). When controlled to the advantageous state, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state (for example, pachinko). The gaming machine 1 is provided with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from the closed state to the open state and then changed to the closed state when controlled to the jackpot gaming state). , A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when more game media than a predetermined number win the variable winning means in the one round game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a one round game. The display means is provided when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means, and the like is provided with an effect control CPU 120 capable of executing the over winning effect when the over winning effect occurs. It is possible to display a first grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value and a second grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value to be granted in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 can display the second grant amount display. , 20SHK1 indicating the number of winning balls given by the game ball entering the special variable winning ball device 7, and 20SHK2 displaying the number of expected winning balls related to the total number of winning balls scheduled to be given in the jackpot game state. When more than the predetermined number of gaming media wins the variable winning means, it is possible to display a specific display that makes the second grant amount display invisible or difficult (for example, displayable). The image display device 5 can display the effect display 20SHEF that makes the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs), and the second grant amount display is visually recognized by the specific display. When it becomes impossible or difficult, the value of the second grant amount display is updated (for example, the image display device 5 is an effect table. (For example, updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult by the display 20SHEF), the specific effect executing means displays the second grant amount by the specific display. The specific effect is started before it becomes invisible or difficult (the effect control CPU 120 starts an over-winning effect before the expected number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult by the effect display 20SHEF, etc.). , Characterized by.

According to such a configuration, a sense of incongruity occurs when the value of the second grant amount display is updated, as compared with the case where the value of the second grant amount display is updated while the second grant amount display is visible. Can be suppressed.

(2) The gaming machine of the above (1) includes audio output means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the specific effect executing means is described as the specific effect. It is possible to execute an effect by the display means and an effect by the audio output means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an effect by the image display device 5 and an effect by the speakers 8L and 8R as an over-winning effect. Being feasible, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the specific effect.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2), when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area close to the variable winning means. Then, the specific display is moved to make the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display invisible or difficult (for example, in the image display device 5, the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7). At that time, the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and the effect display 20SHEF is moved to make the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see. Things etc.).

According to such a configuration, the fact that the game ball has entered the variable winning means can be expressed by the display effect in the display means, and the interest can be improved. Further, since not only the second grant amount display but also the first grant amount display becomes invisible or difficult due to the specific display, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort.

(4) In the gaming machine of the above (3), the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display are visible when the specific display is moving, and the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display. When the specific display reaches the display area where the second grant amount display is displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult (for example, in the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2, the effect display 20SHEF is moving. Sometimes it is visible, and when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area where the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display are displayed, the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display are naturally visible. Therefore, due to the attention to the specific display, it is possible to pay attention to the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display in the state before the value is updated.

(5) In the gaming machine of the above (4), the specific effect executing means is said to be said before the specific display reaches the display area where the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display are displayed. Start a specific effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts an over-winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed). ..

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that more game media than a predetermined number have won the variable winning means by executing the specific effect, so that the second grant amount display is updated. It is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of discomfort at the time.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above, a setting means (for example, a pachinko game) in which any one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The machine 1 is provided with a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" having different jackpot winning probabilities), and the specific effect executing means is the setting. The specific effect can be executed in a manner suggesting a set value set by the means (for example, the image display device 5 can execute an over-winning effect in a manner suggesting a set value set, etc.). ..

With such a configuration, attention to a specific effect can be increased.

(7) In the gaming machine of the above (5), the specific effect executing means ends the specific effect after the display of the specific display is completed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF. After finishing, ending the over-winning production, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the updated value of the second grant amount display can be visually recognized while the specific effect is continued, so that a sense of incongruity due to the update of the second grant amount display can be felt. , Can be suppressed more effectively.

(Another example of transition to a time saving state)
Further, in each of the above-mentioned feature portions and each modification, the mode in which the transition to the time saving state is always performed via the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is operated is illustrated. , The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the time saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time saving state may be shifted without operating the special variable winning ball device 7.

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of the out-of-time symbols or a part of the small hit symbols.

In addition, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or a lottery random number of a missed symbol or a big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed using other lottery random numbers such as the lottery random number of the above, the lottery random number of the small hit symbol, the random number for determining the big hit lottery, and the lottery random number of the fall lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a missed symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if the time saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of the transition to the time saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time saving will not be drawn.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Are the same. However, the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery of time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the timing at the time of winning a prize at the starting port is set. Good.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time saving symbol is drawn, the lottery result by the dedicated random number is used as the winning value when the dedicated random number is used, and when the small hit symbol random number is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the specific small hit symbol is used. When the random number value is used as the winning value and the random number for the falling lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, the random number for the falling lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A time saving area may be provided inside the device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time saving area may be the winning of the time saving symbol.

In addition, in the case where the lottery of the time saving symbol is performed using the structure, when the small hit symbol also uses the time saving symbol, the variable display number of the time saving state is not changed depending on the presence or absence of passing through the time saving area.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the time-saving symbol lottery uses the missing symbol random number, the specific missing symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and when the jackpot symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, it is specified. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the set value cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be the timing after the jackpot determination. It should be noted that the lottery of the time-saving symbols is not executed in the time-saving state or the high-probability time regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, and is executed only in the low-probability low-base state. However, when the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time saving state is already set, it suffices to be decided for each gaming machine regardless of whether the time saving number of times is reset or the lottery is not performed.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time reduction can be made different for each time reduction symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving times given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is necessary that the game state is predetermined.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the derivation lottery for the time-saving end symbol may be executed, and the number of time reductions may be set to the number of times after the time reduction start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where the small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine controlled to a high-probability low-base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high-probability low-base state is set when the game hall is opened, and the high-probability low-base state is the specified number of times. After the variable display of is executed and finished, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 11 Main board 12 Production control board 200 Payout device 202 1st guide passage forming part 201 Ball tank forming part 203 1st passage forming body 210 Terminal board 220 Cover body 271A to 271H Hole Part 314,324,334 Cover part 340 Ball stopper member N1-6, 11-16 Screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A storage unit that can store game media and
A payout unit that can pay out game media,
A guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the payout portion.
A cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion, and a cover portion.
With display means,
The cover portion is provided with a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion to the guide passage forming portion.
The guide passage forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific limiting portions for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion to the payout portion.
The predetermined limiting portion is provided so that the game medium that has fallen on the cover portion can be dropped from the cover portion without staying.
The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area.
The display means
In the first display area and the second display area, the background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed.
In the second display area, it is possible to display the added amount display regarding the added amount of the added game value on the front side of the background image.
At least in the first display area, the amount of the game value given has reached the first predetermined amount as a notification display notifying that the amount of the game value has reached the predetermined amount on the front side of the background image. It is possible to display a first notification display for notifying that and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be given has reached the second predetermined amount.
The grant amount display is updated every time the game value is granted in the advantageous state.
The notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the display, and the display ends.
The characters used for the notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display.
The characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed.
The background image of the specific character used for the given amount display is invisible from the specific area, and the specific character is invisible.
As for the specific characters used in the notification display, the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images